1gm(1)                       General Commands Manual                      gm(1)
2
3
4
5       NAME
6
7              gm  - command-line utility to create, edit, compare, convert, or
8              display images
9
10

SYNOPSIS

12       gm animate [ options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ]
13
14       gm batch [ options ... ] [ script ]
15
16       gm benchmark [ options ... ] subcommand
17
18       gm compare [ options ... ] reference-image [  options  ...  ]  compare-
19       image [ options ... ]
20
21       gm  composite  [  options  ... ] change-image base-image [ mask-image ]
22       output-image
23
24       gm conjure [ options ] script.msl [ [ options ] script.msl ]
25
26       gm convert [ [ options ... ] [ input-file ...  ] [ options ... ] ] out‐
27       put-file
28
29       gm display [ options ... ] file ...  [ [options ... ]file ... ]
30
31       gm identify file [ file ... ]
32
33       gm import [ options ... ] file
34
35       gm mogrify [ options ... ] file ...
36
37       gm  montage  [  options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ] output-
38       file
39
40       gm time subcommand
41
42       gm version
43

DESCRIPTION

45       GraphicsMagick's gm provides a suite of utilities for creating, compar‐
46       ing,  converting, editing, and displaying images.  All of the utilities
47       are provided as sub-commands of a single gm executable.   The  gm  exe‐
48       cutable  returns  the exit code 0 to indicate success, or 1 to indicate
49       failure:
50
51       animate displays an animation (e.g. a GIF file) on any workstation dis‐
52       play running an X server.
53
54       batch  executes  an  arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
55       vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order  to  improve
56       execution  efficiency,  and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
57       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
58
59       benchmark executes one of the other utility commands (e.g. convert) for
60       a specified number of iterations, or execution time, and reports execu‐
61       tion time and other profiling  information  such  as  CPU  utilization.
62       Benchmark provides various operating modes including executing the com‐
63       mand with a varying number of threads, and alternate reporting  formats
64       such as comma-separated value (CSV).
65
66       compare compares two images and reports difference statistics according
67       to specified metrics and/or outputs an image with a visual  representa‐
68       tion  of  the  differences.   It may also be used to test if images are
69       similar within a particular range and  specified  metric,  returning  a
70       truth value to the executing environment.
71
72       composite  composites images (blends or merges images together) to cre‐
73       ate new images.
74
75       conjure interprets and executes scripts in the  Magick  Scripting  Lan‐
76       guage (MSL).
77
78       convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
79       with the same or differing image format  while  applying  an  arbitrary
80       number of image transformations.
81
82       display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
83       play facility. It can display an image on any workstation display  run‐
84       ning an X server.
85
86       identify  describes the format and characteristics of one or more image
87       files. It will also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.
88
89       import reads an image from any visible window on an X server  and  out‐
90       puts  it  as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
91       screen, or any rectangular portion of the screen.
92
93       mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images.  These  transforms
94       include image scaling, image rotation, color reduction, and others. The
95       transmogrified image overwrites the original image.
96
97       montage creates a composite by combining several separate  images.  The
98       images  are  tiled  on  the  composite image with the name of the image
99       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
100
101       time executes a subcommand and reports the user, system, and total exe‐
102       cution time consumed.
103
104       version  reports  the  GraphicsMagick  release version, maximum sample-
105       depth, copyright notice, supported features, and the options used while
106       building the software.
107
108       The GraphicsMagick utilities recognize the following image formats:
109
110
111       Name  Mode Description
112        o  3FR       r-- Hasselblad Photo RAW
113        o  8BIM      rw- Photoshop resource format
114        o  8BIMTEXT  rw- Photoshop resource text format
115        o  8BIMWTEXT rw- Photoshop resource wide text format
116        o  APP1      rw- Raw application information
117        o  APP1JPEG  rw- Raw JPEG binary data
118        o  ART       r-- PF1: 1st Publisher
119        o  ARW       r-- Sony Alpha DSLR RAW
120        o  AVS       rw+ AVS X image
121        o  BIE       rw- Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
122                         interchange format
123        o  BMP       rw+ Microsoft Windows bitmap image
124        o  BMP2      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v2
125        o  BMP3      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v3
126        o  CACHE     --- Magick Persistent Cache image format
127        o  CALS      rw- Continuous Acquisition and Life-cycle
128                         Support Type 1 image
129        o  CAPTION   r-- Caption (requires separate size info)
130        o  CIN       rw- Kodak Cineon Format
131        o  CMYK      rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
132                         samples (8 or 16 bits, depending on
133                         the image depth)
134        o  CMYKA     rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and
135                         matte samples (8 or 16 bits, depending
136                         on the image depth)
137        o  CR2       r-- Canon Photo RAW
138        o  CRW       r-- Canon Photo RAW
139        o  CUR       r-- Microsoft Cursor Icon
140        o  CUT       r-- DR Halo
141        o  DCM       r-- Digital Imaging and Communications in
142                         Medicine image
143        o  DCR       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
144        o  DCX       rw+ ZSoft IBM PC multi-page Paintbrush
145        o  DNG       r-- Adobe Digital Negative
146        o  DPS       r-- Display PostScript Interpreter
147        o  DPX       rw- Digital Moving Picture Exchange
148        o  EPDF      rw- Encapsulated Portable Document Format
149        o  EPI       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
150                         Interchange format
151        o  EPS       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
152        o  EPS2      -w- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
153        o  EPS3      -w- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
154        o  EPSF      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
155        o  EPSI      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
156                         Interchange format
157        o  EPT       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript with MS-DOS
158                         TIFF preview
159        o  EPT2      rw- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
160                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
161        o  EPT3      rw- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
162                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
163        o  EXIF      rw- Exif digital camera binary data
164        o  FAX       rw+ Group 3 FAX (Not TIFF Group3 FAX!)
165        o  FITS      rw- Flexible Image Transport System
166        o  FRACTAL   r-- Plasma fractal image
167        o  FPX       rw- FlashPix Format
168        o  GIF       rw+ CompuServe graphics interchange format
169        o  GIF87     rw- CompuServe graphics interchange format
170                         (version 87a)
171        o  GRADIENT  r-- Gradual passing from one shade to
172                         another
173        o  GRAY      rw+ Raw gray samples (8/16/32 bits,
174                         depending on the image depth)
175        o  HISTOGRAM -w- Histogram of the image
176        o  HRZ       r-- HRZ: Slow scan TV
177        o  HTML      -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
178                         client-side image map
179        o  ICB       rw+ Truevision Targa image
180        o  ICC       rw- ICC Color Profile
181        o  ICM       rw- ICC Color Profile
182        o  ICO       r-- Microsoft icon
183        o  ICON      r-- Microsoft icon
184        o  IDENTITY  r-- Hald CLUT identity image
185        o  IMAGE     r-- GraphicsMagick Embedded Image
186        o  INFO      -w+ Image descriptive information and
187                          statistics
188        o  IPTC      rw- IPTC Newsphoto
189        o  IPTCTEXT  rw- IPTC Newsphoto text format
190        o  IPTCWTEXT rw- IPTC Newsphoto wide text format
191        o  JBG       rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
192                         interchange format
193        o  JBIG      rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
194                         interchange format
195        o  JNG       rw- JPEG Network Graphics
196        o  JP2       rw- JPEG-2000 JP2 File Format Syntax
197        o  JPC       rw- JPEG-2000 Code Stream Syntax
198        o  JPEG      rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
199                         JFIF format
200        o  JPG       rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
201                         JFIF format
202        o  K25       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
203        o  KDC       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
204        o  LABEL     r-- Text image format
205        o  M2V       rw+ MPEG-2 Video Stream
206        o  MAP       rw- Colormap intensities and indices
207        o  MAT       r-- MATLAB image format
208        o  MATTE     -w+ MATTE format
209        o  MIFF      rw+ Magick Image File Format
210        o  MNG       rw+ Multiple-image Network Graphics
211        o  MONO      rw- Bi-level bitmap in least-significant-
212                         -byte-first order
213        o  MPC       rw+ Magick Persistent Cache image format
214        o  MPEG      rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
215        o  MPG       rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
216        o  MRW       r-- Minolta Photo Raw
217        o  MSL       r-- Magick Scripting Language
218        o  MTV       rw+ MTV Raytracing image format
219        o  MVG       rw- Magick Vector Graphics
220        o  NEF       r-- Nikon Electronic Format
221        o  NULL      r-- Constant image of uniform color
222        o  OTB       rw- On-the-air bitmap
223        o  P7        rw+ Xv thumbnail format
224        o  PAL       rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
225        o  PALM      rw- Palm Pixmap
226        o  PBM       rw+ Portable bitmap format (black and white)
227        o  PCD       rw- Photo CD
228        o  PCDS      rw- Photo CD
229        o  PCL       -w- Page Control Language
230        o  PCT       rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
231        o  PCX       rw- ZSoft IBM PC Paintbrush
232        o  PDB       rw+ Palm Database ImageViewer Format
233        o  PDF       rw+ Portable Document Format
234        o  PEF       r-- Pentax Electronic File
235        o  PFA       r-- TrueType font
236        o  PFB       r-- TrueType font
237        o  PGM       rw+ Portable graymap format (gray scale)
238        o  PGX       r-- JPEG-2000 VM Format
239        o  PICON     rw- Personal Icon
240        o  PICT      rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
241        o  PIX       r-- Alias/Wavefront RLE image format
242        o  PLASMA    r-- Plasma fractal image
243        o  PNG       rw- Portable Network Graphics
244        o  PNG24     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 24 bit RGB
245                         opaque only
246        o  PNG32     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 32 bit RGBA
247                         semitransparency OK
248        o  PNG8      rw- Portable Network Graphics, 8-bit
249                         indexed, binary transparency only
250        o  PNM       rw+ Portable anymap
251        o  PPM       rw+ Portable pixmap format (color)
252        o  PREVIEW   -w- Show a preview an image enhancement,
253                         effect, or f/x
254        o  PS        rw+ Adobe PostScript
255        o  PS2       -w+ Adobe Level II PostScript
256        o  PS3       -w+ Adobe Level III PostScript
257        o  PSD       rw- Adobe Photoshop bitmap
258        o  PTIF      rw- Pyramid encoded TIFF
259        o  PWP       r-- Seattle Film Works
260        o  RAF       r-- Fuji Photo RAW
261        o  RAS       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
262        o  RGB       rw+ Raw red, green, and blue samples
263        o  RGBA      rw+ Raw red, green, blue, and matte samples
264        o  RLA       r-- Alias/Wavefront image
265        o  RLE       r-- Utah Run length encoded image
266        o  SCT       r-- Scitex HandShake
267        o  SFW       r-- Seattle Film Works
268        o  SGI       rw+ Irix RGB image
269        o  SHTML     -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
270                         client-side image map
271        o  STEGANO   r-- Steganographic image
272        o  SUN       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
273        o  SVG       rw+ Scalable Vector Gaphics
274        o  TEXT      rw+ Raw text
275        o  TGA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
276        o  TIFF      rw+ Tagged Image File Format
277        o  TILE      r-- Tile image with a texture
278        o  TIM       r-- PSX TIM
279        o  TOPOL     r-- TOPOL X Image
280        o  TTF       r-- TrueType font
281        o  TXT       rw+ Raw text
282        o  UIL       -w- X-Motif UIL table
283        o  UYVY      rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
284        o  VDA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
285        o  VICAR     rw- VICAR rasterfile format
286        o  VID       rw+ Visual Image Directory
287        o  VIFF      rw+ Khoros Visualization image
288        o  VST       rw+ Truevision Targa image
289        o  WBMP      rw- Wireless Bitmap (level 0) image
290        o  WMF       r-- Windows Metafile
291        o  WPG       r-- Word Perfect Graphics
292        o  X         rw- X Image
293        o  X3F       r-- Foveon X3 (Sigma/Polaroid) RAW
294        o  XBM       rw- X Windows system bitmap (black
295                         and white)
296        o  XC        r-- Constant image uniform color
297        o  XCF       r-- GIMP image
298        o  XMP       rw- Adobe XML metadata
299        o  XPM       rw- X Windows system pixmap (color)
300        o  XV        rw+ Khoros Visualization image
301        o  XWD       rw- X Windows system window dump (color)
302        o  YUV       rw- CCIR 601 4:1:1 or 4:2:2 (8-bit only)
303
304           Modes:
305                     r   Read
306                     w   Write
307                     +   Multi-image
308
309
310       Support  for  some  of  these  formats  require  additional programs or
311       libraries.  See README in the source package for where to find optional
312       additional software.
313
314       Note,  a  format delineated with + means that if more than one image is
315       specified, frames are combined into  a  single  multi-image  file.  Use
316       +adjoin if you want a single image produced for each frame.
317
318       Your installation might not support all of the formats in the list.  To
319       get an accurate listing of the formats  supported  by  your  particular
320       configuration, run "gm convert -list format".
321
322       Raw  images  are  expected to have one byte per pixel unless gm is com‐
323       piled in 16-bit quantum mode or in 32-bit quantum mode. Here,  the  raw
324       data  is  expected  to  be  stored two or four bytes per pixel, respec‐
325       tively, in most-significant-byte-first order.   For  example,  you  can
326       tell  if  gm was compiled in 16-bit mode by typing "gm version" without
327       any options, and looking for "Q:16" in the first line of output.
328

FILES AND FORMATS

330       By default, the image format is determined by its magic  number,  i.e.,
331       the  first few bytes of the file. To specify a particular image format,
332       precede  the  filename  with  an  image  format  name   and   a   colon
333       (i.e.ps:image)  or  specify  the  image  type  as  the  filename suffix
334       (i.e.image.ps).  The magic number takes precedence  over  the  filename
335       suffix  and  the  prefix takes precedence over the magic number and the
336       suffix in input files.  When a file is read, its magic number is stored
337       in  the  "image->magick"  string.   In  output  files, the prefix takes
338       precedence over the filename suffix,  and  the  filename  suffix  takes
339       precedence over the "image->magick" string.
340
341       To read the "built-in" formats (GRANITE, H, LOGO, NETSCAPE, PLASMA, and
342       ROSE) use a prefix (including the colon) without a filename or  suffix.
343       To read the XC format, follow the colon with a color specification.  To
344       read the CAPTION format, follow the colon with a text string or with  a
345       filename prefixed with the at symbol (@).
346
347
348       When  you  specify X as your image type, the filename has special mean‐
349       ing. It specifies an X window by id, name, or root. If no  filename  is
350       specified,  the window is selected by clicking the mouse in the desired
351       window.
352
353       Specify input_file as - for standard input, output_file as - for  stan‐
354       dard  output.   If  input_file has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is
355       uncompressed with uncompress or gunzip  respectively.   If  output_file
356       has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is compressed using with compress
357       or gzip respectively.
358
359       Use an optional index enclosed in brackets after an input file name  to
360       specify  a  desired  subimage  of  a multi-resolution image format like
361       Photo CD (e.g. "img0001.pcd[4]") or  a  range  for  MPEG  images  (e.g.
362       "video.mpg[50-75]").  A  subimage  specification  can be disjoint (e.g.
363       "image.tiff[2,7,4]"). For raw images, specify a subimage with a  geome‐
364       try  (e.g.  -size  640x512  "image.rgb[320x256+50+50]").   Surround the
365       image name with quotation marks to prevent your shell from interpreting
366       the  square  brackets.  Single images are written with the filename you
367       specify. However, multi-part images (e.g., a multi-page PostScript doc‐
368       ument  with  +adjoin  specified)  may  be written with the scene number
369       included as part of the filename. In order to include the scene  number
370       in  the  filename,  it is necessary to include a printf-style %d format
371       specification in the file name and use the +adjoin option. For example,
372
373           image%02d.miff
374
375
376       writes files image00.miff, image01.miff, etc. Only a single  specifica‐
377       tion  is allowed within an output filename. If more than one specifica‐
378       tion is present, it will be ignored. It is best to embed the scene num‐
379       ber  in  the  base part of the file name, not in the extension, because
380       the extension will not be a recognizeable image type.
381
382       When running a commandline utility, you can prepend an at sign @  to  a
383       filename to read a list of image filenames from that file. This is con‐
384       venient in the event you have too many image filenames to  fit  on  the
385       command line.
386

OPTIONS

388       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
389       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
390       until  the  set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
391       Some options only affect the decoding of images  and  others  only  the
392       encoding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
393
394       This  is a combined list of the command-line options used by the Graph‐
395       icsMagick utilities (animate,  compare,  composite,  convert,  display,
396       identify, import, mogrify and montage).
397
398
399       In  this  document,  angle  brackets ("<>") enclose variables and curly
400       brackets ("{}") enclose optional parameters. For example, "-fuzz  <dis‐
401       tance>{%}" means you can use the option "-fuzz 10" or "-fuzz 2%".
402
403
404       -adjoin
405              join images into a single multi-image file
406
407              By  default,  all  images of an image sequence are stored in the
408              same file. However, some formats  (e.g.  JPEG)  do  not  support
409              storing more than one image per file and only the first frame in
410              an image sequence will be saved unless the result  is  saved  to
411              separate  files.  Use +adjoin to force saving multiple frames to
412              multiple numbered files. If +adjoin is  used,  then  the  output
413              filename  must  include  a printf style formatting specification
414              for the numeric part of the filename.  For example,
415
416                  image%02d.miff
417
418
419       -affine <matrix>
420              drawing transform matrix
421
422              This option provides a transform matrix {sx,rx,ry,sy,tx,ty}  for
423              use by subsequent -draw or -transform options.
424
425       -antialias
426              remove pixel aliasing
427
428              By default antialiasing algorithms are used when drawing objects
429              (e.g. lines) or rendering vector formats  (e.g.  WMF  and  Post‐
430              script).  Use  +antialias  to  disable use of antialiasing algo‐
431              rithms.  Reasons  to  disable  antialiasing   include   avoiding
432              increasing colors in the image, or improving rendering speed.
433
434       -append
435              append a set of images
436
437              This option creates a single image where the images in the orig‐
438              inal set are stacked top-to-bottom.  If they are not of the same
439              width, any narrow images will be expanded to fit using the back‐
440              ground color.  Use +append to stack images  left-to-right.   The
441              set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.  If
442              the -append option appears after all of the  input  images,  all
443              images are appended.
444
445        -asc-cdl <spec>
446              apply ASC CDL color transform
447
448              Applies  ("bakes  in")  the  ASC  CDL, which is a format for the
449              exchange of basic  primary  color  grading  information  between
450              equipment  and software from different manufacturers. The format
451              defines the math for three functions: slope, offset  and  power.
452              Each  function  uses a number for the red, green, and blue color
453              channels for a total of nine numbers comprising a  single  color
454              decision. The tenth number (optional) is for chromiance (satura‐
455              tion) as specified by ASC CDL 1.2.
456
457              The argument string is comma delimited and is in  the  following
458              form (but without invervening spaces or line breaks)
459
460                  redslope,redoffset,redpower:
461                  greenslope,greenoffset,greenpower:
462                  blueslope,blueoffset,bluepower:
463                  saturation
464
465
466              with the unity (no change) specification being:
467
468                  "1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0"
469
470
471       -authenticate <string>
472              decrypt image with this password
473
474              Use  this option to supply a password for decrypting an image or
475              an image sequence, if it is being read from a format such as PDF
476              that  supports  encryption.   Encrypting images being written is
477              not supported.
478
479       -auto-orient
480              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
481
482              Adjusts the image orienation so that it is suitable for viewing.
483              Uses the orientation tag obtained from the image file or as sup‐
484              plied by the -orient option.
485
486       -average
487              average a set of images
488
489              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
490              If  the  -average  option appears after all of the input images,
491              all images are averaged.
492
493       -backdrop
494              display the image centered on a backdrop.
495
496              This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is useful
497              for  hiding other X window activity while viewing the image. The
498              color of the backdrop is specified as the foreground color  (X11
499              default is black).  Refer to "X Resources", below, for details.
500
501       -background <color>
502              the background color
503
504              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
505              -fill option.
506
507       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
508              pixels below the threshold become black
509
510              Use -black-threshold to set pixels with values below the  speci‐
511              fied  threshold  to  minimum value (black). If only one value is
512              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
513              intensity  thresholding  is  used. If the color threshold values
514              are not identical then channel-based thresholding is  used,  and
515              color  distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
516              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
517              a  channel  later  in  the  list.  If  a  percent  (%) symbol is
518              appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
519              range.
520
521       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
522              blue chromaticity primary point
523
524       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
525              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
526
527              Blur with the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
528
529       -border <width>x<height>
530              surround the image with a border of color
531
532              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
533
534       -bordercolor <color>
535              the border color
536
537              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
538              -fill option.
539
540       -borderwidth <geometry>
541              the border width
542
543       -box <color>
544              set the color of the annotation bounding box
545
546              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
547              -fill option.
548
549              See -draw for further details.
550
551       -channel <type>
552              the type of channel
553
554              Choose  from:  Red,  Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan, Magenta,
555              Yellow, Black, or Gray.
556
557              Use this option to extract a particular channel from the  image.
558              Opacity,  for example, is useful for extracting the opacity val‐
559              ues from an image.
560
561       -charcoal <factor>
562              simulate a charcoal drawing
563
564       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
565              remove pixels from the interior of an image
566
567              Width and height give the number of columns and rows to  remove,
568              and  x  and y are offsets that give the location of the leftmost
569              column and topmost row to remove.
570
571              The x offset normally specifies the leftmost column  to  remove.
572              If  the  -gravity  option  is  present  with NorthEast, East, or
573              SouthEast gravity, it gives the distance leftward from the right
574              edge of the image to the rightmost column to remove.  Similarly,
575              the y offset normally specifies the topmost row to  remove,  but
576              if  the  -gravity  option  is  present with SouthWest, South, or
577              SouthEast gravity, it specifies the  distance  upward  from  the
578              bottom edge of the image to the bottom row to remove.
579
580              The  -chop option removes entire rows and columns, and moves the
581              remaining corner blocks leftward and upward to close the gaps.
582
583       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
584
585              If a clipping path is present, it will be applied to  subsequent
586              operations.
587
588              For example, if you type the following command:
589
590                  gm convert -clip -negate cockatoo.tif negated.tif
591
592
593              only the pixels within the clipping path are negated.
594
595              The  -clip feature requires the XML library.  If the XML library
596              is not present, the option is ignored.
597
598       -coalesce
599              merge a sequence of images
600
601              Each image N in the sequence after Image 0 is replaced with  the
602              image created by flattening images 0 through N.
603
604              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
605              If the -coalesce option appears after all of the  input  images,
606              all images are coalesced.
607
608       -colorize <value>
609              colorize the image with the pen color
610
611              Specify  the  amount  of  colorization  as a percentage. You can
612              apply separate colorization values to the red, green,  and  blue
613              channels  of  the image with a colorization value list delimited
614              with slashes (e.g. 0/0/50).
615
616              The -colorize option may be used in conjunction  with  -modulate
617              to produce a nice sepia toned image like:
618
619                  gm convert input.ppm -modulate 115,0,100 \
620                            -colorize 7,21,50 output.ppm.
621
622
623       -colormap <type>
624              define the colormap type
625
626              Choose between shared or private.
627
628              This  option  only  applies  when the default X server visual is
629              PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more details.  By
630              default, a shared colormap is allocated. The image shares colors
631              with other X clients.  Some image colors could be  approximated,
632              therefore  your  image  may  look  very different than intended.
633              Choose Private and the image colors appear exactly as  they  are
634              defined.  However,  other  clients  may  go technicolor when the
635              image colormap is installed.
636
637       -colors <value>
638              preferred number of colors in the image
639
640              The actual number of colors in the image may be less  than  your
641              request, but never more. Note, this is a color reduction option.
642              Images with less unique colors than specified with  this  option
643              will  have  any duplicate or unused colors removed. The ordering
644              of an existing color palette may be altered. When converting  an
645              image  from  color  to  grayscale, convert the image to the gray
646              colorspace before reducing the number of colors since  doing  so
647              is most efficient. Refer to <a href="quantize.html">quantize for
648              more details.
649
650              Note, options -dither, -colorspace, and  -treedepth  affect  the
651              color reduction algorithm.
652
653       -colorspace <value>
654              the type of colorspace
655
656              Choices  are:  CineonLog,  CMYK,  GRAY,  HSL,  HWB,  OHTA,  RGB,
657              Rec601Luma, Rec709Luma, Rec601YCbCr,  Rec709YCbCr,  Transparent,
658              XYZ, YCbCr, YIQ, YPbPr, or YUV.
659
660              Color reduction, by default, takes place in the RGB color space.
661              Empirical evidence suggests that distances in color spaces  such
662              as  YUV  or  YIQ correspond to perceptual color differences more
663              closely than do distances in RGB space.  These color spaces  may
664              give  better  results  when  color  reducing an image.  Refer to
665              quantize for more details.  Two gray colorspaces are  supported.
666              The  Rec601Luma space is based on the recommendations for legacy
667              NTSC television (ITU-R BT.601-5).  The Rec709Luma space is based
668              on  the  recommendations  for  HDTV (Rec. ITU-R BT.709-5) and is
669              suitable for use with computer graphics,  and  for  contemporary
670              CRT   displays.   The  GRAY  colorspace  currently  selects  the
671              Rec601Luma colorspace by default for backwards  compatibly  rea‐
672              sons. This default may be re-considered in the future.
673
674              Two  YCbCr  colorspaces  are supported. The Rec601YCbCr space is
675              based on the recommendations for legacy NTSC  television  (ITU-R
676              BT.601-5).  The Rec709CbCr space is based on the recommendations
677              for HDTV (Rec.  ITU-R BT.709-5) and is suitable for suitable for
678              use  with  computer graphics, and for contemporary CRT displays.
679              The YCbCr colorspace specification is equivalent toRec601YCbCr.
680
681
682              The Transparent color space behaves uniquely  in  that  it  pre‐
683              serves the matte channel of the image if it exists.
684
685              The  -colors  or  -monochrome option, or saving to a file format
686              which requires color reduction, is required for this  option  to
687              take effect.
688
689       -comment <string>
690              annotate an image with a comment
691
692              Use  this option to assign a specific comment to the image, when
693              writing to an image  format  that  supports  comments.  You  can
694              include  the image filename, type, width, height, or other image
695              attribute by embedding special format  characters  listed  under
696              the  -format option.  The comment is not drawn on the image, but
697              is embedded in the image datastream via a "Comment" tag or simi‐
698              lar  mechanism.   If  you  want the comment to be visible on the
699              image itself, use the -draw option instead.
700
701              For example,
702
703                   -comment "%m:%f %wx%h"
704
705
706              produces an image comment of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
707              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
708
709              If the first character of string is @, the image comment is read
710              from a file titled by the remaining characters  in  the  string.
711              Please  note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source
712              that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the  con‐
713              tent  of  an  arbitrary readable file could be incorporated in a
714              comment in the output file (a security risk).
715
716              If the -comment option appears multiple  times,  only  the  last
717              comment is stored.
718
719              In  PNG  images,  the  comment is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk
720              with the keyword "comment".
721
722       -compose <operator>
723              the type of image composition
724
725              The description of  composition  uses  abstract  terminology  in
726              order  to  allow  the  the  description  to be more clear, while
727              avoiding constant values which  are  specific  to  a  particular
728              build  configuration.  Each  image  pixel is represented by red,
729              green, and blue levels (which  are  equal  for  a  gray  pixel).
730              MaxRGB  is the maximum integral value which may be stored in the
731              red, green, or blue channels of the image. Each image pixel  may
732              also  optionally (if the image matte channel is enabled) have an
733              associated level of opacity (ranging from  opaque  to  transpar‐
734              ent),  which may be used to determine the influence of the pixel
735              color when compositing the pixel with another  image  pixel.  If
736              the  image  matte  channel  is  disabled, then all pixels in the
737              image are treated as opaque.  The color of an  opaque  pixel  is
738              fully  visible  while  the color of a transparent pixel color is
739              entirely absent (pixel color is ignored).
740
741              By definition, raster images have a rectangular shape. All image
742              rows  are  of  equal length, and all image columns have the same
743              number of rows. By treating the  opacity  channel  as  a  visual
744              "mask"  the rectangular image may be given a "shape" by treating
745              the opacity channel as a cookie-cutter  for  the  image.  Pixels
746              within  the shape are opaque, while pixels outside the shape are
747              transparent. Pixels on the boundary of the shape may be  between
748              opaque and transparent in order to provide antialiasing (visual‐
749              ly smooth edges). The description of the  composition  operators
750              use  this concept of image "shape" in order to make the descrip‐
751              tion of the operators easier to understand. While it  is  conve‐
752              nient to describe the operators in terms of "shapes" they are by
753              no means limited to mask-style operations since they  are  based
754              on  continuous  floating-point  mathematics  rather  than simple
755              boolean operations.
756
757              By default, the Over composite operator is used.  The  following
758              composite operators are available:
759
760                   Over
761                   In
762                   Out
763                   Atop
764                   Xor
765                   Plus
766                   Minus
767                   Add
768                   Subtract
769                   Difference
770                   Divide
771                   Multiply
772                   Bumpmap
773                   Copy
774                   CopyRed
775                   CopyGreen
776                   CopyBlue
777                   CopyOpacity
778                   CopyCyan
779                   CopyMagenta
780                   CopyYellow
781                   CopyBlack
782
783
784              The behavior of each operator is described below.
785
786
787               Over
788
789                    The result will be the union of the two image shapes, with
790                    opaque areas of change-image obscuring base-image  in  the
791                    region of overlap.
792
793               In
794
795                    The  result  is  simply  change-image  cut by the shape of
796                    base-image. None of the image data of base-image  will  be
797                    in the result.
798
799               Out
800
801                    The  resulting  image  is  change-image  with the shape of
802                    base-image cut out.
803
804               Atop
805
806                    The result is the same shape as base-image,  with  change-
807                    image obscuring base-image where the image shapes overlap.
808                    Note this differs from over because the portion of change-
809                    image  outside  base-image's  shape does not appear in the
810                    result.
811
812               Xor
813
814                    The result is the image data from  both  change-image  and
815                    base-image that is outside the overlap region. The overlap
816                    region will be blank.
817
818               Plus
819
820                    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output  val‐
821                    ues are cropped to MaxRGB (no overflow). This operation is
822                    independent of the matte channels.
823
824               Minus
825
826                    The result of change-image -  base-image,  with  underflow
827                    cropped  to  zero.  The  matte  channel is ignored (set to
828                    opaque, full coverage).
829
830               Add
831
832                    The result of change-image  +  base-image,  with  overflow
833                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1).
834
835               Subtract
836
837                    The  result  of  change-image - base-image, with underflow
838                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and subtract oper‐
839                    ators can be used to perform reversible transformations.
840
841               Difference
842
843                    The result of abs(change-image - base-image). This is use‐
844                    ful for comparing two very similar images.
845
846               Divide
847
848                    The result of change-image / base-image.  This  is  useful
849                    for  improving the readability of text on unevenly illumi‐
850                    nated photos (by using a gaussian blurred copy of  change-
851                    image as base-image).
852
853               Multiply
854
855                    The  result  of  change-image * base-image. This is useful
856                    for the creation of drop-shadows.
857
858               Bumpmap
859
860                    The result base-image shaded by change-image.
861
862               Copy
863
864                    The resulting image is base-image  replaced  with  change-
865                    image. Here the matte information is ignored.
866
867               CopyRed
868
869                    The  resulting  image  is  the  red  channel in base-image
870                    replaced with the red channel in change-image.  The  other
871                    channels are copied untouched.
872
873               CopyGreen
874
875                    The  resulting  image  is  the green channel in base-image
876                    replaced with the green channel in change-image. The other
877                    channels are copied untouched.
878
879               CopyBlue
880
881                    The  resulting  image  is  the  blue channel in base-image
882                    replaced with the blue channel in change-image. The  other
883                    channels are copied untouched.
884
885               CopyOpacity
886
887                    The  resulting  image is the opacity channel in base-image
888                    replaced with the opacity  channel  in  change-image.  The
889                    other channels are copied untouched.
890
891               CopyCyan
892
893                    The  resulting  image  is  the  cyan channel in base-image
894                    replaced with the cyan channel in change-image. The  other
895                    channels  are  copied  untouched.  Use  of  this  operator
896                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
897
898               CopyMagenta
899
900                    The resulting image is the magenta channel  in  base-image
901                    replaced  with  the  magenta  channel in change-image. The
902                    other channels are copied untouched. Use of this  operator
903                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
904
905               CopyYellow
906
907                    The  resulting  image  is the yellow channel in base-image
908                    replaced with the  yellow  channel  in  change-image.  The
909                    other  channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
910                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
911
912               CopyBlack
913
914                    The resulting image is the  black  channel  in  base-image
915                    replaced with the black channel in change-image. The other
916                    channels  are  copied  untouched.  Use  of  this  operator
917                    requires  that  base-image  be  in  CMYK(A) colorspace. If
918                    change-image is not in CMYK space, then  the  change-image
919                    pixel intensities are used.
920
921
922
923
924       -compress <type>
925              the type of image compression
926
927              Choices  are:  None,  BZip, Fax, Group3, Group4, JPEG, Lossless,
928              LZW, RLE, Zip, LZMA, JPEG2000, JPEG2000, JBIG, JBIG2,  WebP,  or
929              ZSTD.
930
931
932              Specify  +compress  to store the binary image in an uncompressed
933              format.  The default is the compression type  of  the  specified
934              image file.
935
936              "Lossless"  refers  to lossless JPEG, which is only available if
937              the JPEG library has been patched to support it. Use of lossless
938              JPEG is generally not recommended.
939
940              Use  the -quality option to set the compression level to be used
941              by the JPEG, JPEG-2000, PNG, MIFF, MPEG, and TIFF encoders.  Use
942              the  -sampling-factor  option  to  set the sampling factor to be
943              used by the DPX, JPEG, MPEG, and YUV encoders  for  downsampling
944              the chroma channels.
945
946       -contrast
947              enhance or reduce the image contrast
948
949              This  option  enhances  the  intensity  differences  between the
950              lighter and darker elements  of  the  image.  Use  -contrast  to
951              enhance the image or +contrast to reduce the image contrast.
952
953
954              For a more pronounced effect you can repeat the option:
955
956                  gm convert rose: -contrast -contrast rose_c2.png
957
958
959       -convolve <kernel>
960              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
961
962              The  kernel  is  specified as a comma-separated list of floating
963              point values, ordered left-to right, starting with the top  row.
964              The  order of the kernel is determined by the square root of the
965              number of entries.  Presently only square kernels are supported.
966
967       -create-directories
968              create output directory if required
969
970              Use this option with -output-directory if the input  paths  con‐
971              tain  subdirectories  and it is desired to create similar subdi‐
972              rectories in the output directory.  Without this option, mogrify
973              will fail if the required output directory does not exist.
974
975       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
976              preferred size and location of the cropped image
977
978              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
979
980              The  width  and  height  give the size of the image that remains
981              after cropping, and x and y are offsets that give  the  location
982              of  the top left corner of the cropped image with respect to the
983              original image.  To specify the amount to be removed, use -shave
984              instead.
985
986              If the x and y offsets are present, a single image is generated,
987              consisting of the pixels from the cropping region.  The  offsets
988              specify  the  location  of the upper left corner of the cropping
989              region measured downward and rightward with respect to the upper
990              left  corner  of  the  image.  If the -gravity option is present
991              with NorthEast, East, or SouthEast gravity, it  gives  the  dis‐
992              tance  leftward  from  the  right edge of the image to the right
993              edge of the cropping region.  Similarly, if the -gravity  option
994              is present with SouthWest, South, or SouthEast gravity, the dis‐
995              tance is measured upward between the bottom edges.
996
997              If the x and y offsets are omitted, a set of tiles of the speci‐
998              fied  geometry,  covering  the entire input image, is generated.
999              The rightmost tiles and the bottom  tiles  are  smaller  if  the
1000              specified  geometry  extends  beyond the dimensions of the input
1001              image.
1002
1003       -cycle <amount>
1004              displace image colormap by amount
1005
1006              Amount defines the  number  of  positions  each  colormap  entry
1007              isshifted.
1008
1009
1010       -debug <events>
1011              enable debug printout
1012
1013              The  events  parameter  specifies which events are to be logged.
1014              It can be either None, All, or a comma-separated list consisting
1015              of  one or more of the following domains: Annotate, Blob, Cache,
1016              Coder,  Configure,  Deprecate,  Error,  Exception,   FatalError,
1017              Information,  Locale,  Option,  Render, Resource, TemporaryFile,
1018              Transform, User.  Warning, or X11, For example, to log cache and
1019              blob events, use
1020
1021                  gm convert -debug "Cache,Blob" rose: rose.png
1022
1023
1024              The  "User"  domain  is  normally  empty, but developers can log
1025              "User" events in their private copy of GraphicsMagick.
1026
1027              Use the -log option to specify the format for debugging output.
1028
1029              Use +debug to turn off all logging.
1030
1031              An alternative to using -debug is to use the MAGICK_DEBUG  envi‐
1032              ronment  variable. The allowed values for the MAGICK_DEBUG envi‐
1033              ronment variable are the same as for the -debug option.
1034
1035       -deconstruct
1036              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
1037
1038              This option compares each image with the next in a sequence  and
1039              returns  the maximum bounding region of any pixel differences it
1040              discovers.  This method can undo a coalesced  sequence  returned
1041              by  the  -coalesce  option, and is useful for removing redundant
1042              information from a GIF or MNG animation.
1043
1044              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1045              option.   If  the  -deconstruct  option appears after all of the
1046              input images, all images are deconstructed.
1047
1048       -define <key>{=<value>},...
1049              add coder/decoder specific options This option  creates  one  or
1050              more  definitions  for  coders and decoders to use while reading
1051              and writing image data. Definitions may be passed to coders  and
1052              decoders  to  control options that are specific to certain image
1053              formats. If value is missing for a definition,  an  empty-valued
1054              definition  of  a  flag  will be created with that name. This is
1055              used to control on/off options. Use +define <key>,... to  remove
1056              definitions  previously  created.  Use +define "*" to remove all
1057              existing definitions.
1058
1059              The following definitions may be created:
1060
1061
1062               cineon:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1063
1064                    Use the cineon:colorspace option  when  reading  a  Cineon
1065                    file  to specify the colorspace the Cineon file uses. This
1066                    overrides the colorspace type implied by  the  DPX  header
1067                    (if any).
1068
1069               dpx:bits-per-sample=<value>
1070
1071                    If  the dpx:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1072                    will write DPX images with the specified bits per  sample,
1073                    overriding any existing depth value. If this option is not
1074                    specified, then the value is based on the  existing  image
1075                    depth value from the original image file. The DPX standard
1076                    supports bits per sample values of 1, 8, 10, 12,  and  16.
1077                    Many DPX readers demand a sample size of 10 bits with type
1078                    A padding (see below).
1079
1080               dpx:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1081
1082                    Use the dpx:colorspace option when reading a DPX  file  to
1083                    specify  the  colorspace the DPX file uses. This overrides
1084                    the colorspace type implied by the DPX header (if any).
1085
1086               dpx:packing-method={packed|a|b|lsbpad|msbpad}
1087
1088                    DPX samples are output within 32-bit words.  They  may  be
1089                    tightly  packed  end-to-end  within  the words ("packed"),
1090                    padded with null bits to the right of the sample  ("a"  or
1091                    "lsbpad"),  or  padded  with  null bits to the left of the
1092                    sample ("b" or "msbpad"). This option only has  an  effect
1093                    for  sample  sizes  of  10  or 12 bits. If samples are not
1094                    packed, the DPX standard recommends type A  padding.  Many
1095                    DPX  readers  demand  a sample size of 10 bits with type A
1096                    padding.
1097
1098               dpx:pixel-endian={lsb|msb}
1099
1100                    Allows the user to specify the endian order of the  pixels
1101                    when  reading  or writing the DPX files. Sometimes this is
1102                    useful if the file is (or must be) written incorrectly  so
1103                    that  the file header and the pixels use different endian‐
1104                    ness.
1105
1106               dpx:swap-samples={true|false}
1107
1108                    GraphicsMagick strives to adhere to the DPX  standard  but
1109                    certain aspects of the standard can be quite confusing. As
1110                    a result, some 10-bit DPX files have Red and  Blue  inter‐
1111                    changed,  or  Cb  and  Cr interchanged due to an different
1112                    interpretation of  the  standard,  or  getting  the  wires
1113                    crossed.  The  swap-samples  option  may  be supplied when
1114                    reading or writing in order to read  or  write  using  the
1115                    necessary sample order.
1116
1117               jp2:rate=<value>
1118
1119                    Specify  the  compression  factor  to  use  while  writing
1120                    JPEG-2000 files. The compression factor is the  reciprocal
1121                    of  the  compression ratio. The valid range is 0.0 to 1.0,
1122                    with 1.0 indicating lossless compression. If defined, this
1123                    value  overrides the -quality setting. The default quality
1124                    setting of 75 results in a rate value of 0.06641.
1125
1126               jpeg:block-smoothing={true|false}
1127
1128                    Enables or disables block smoothing when  reading  a  JPEG
1129                    file (default enabled).
1130
1131               jpeg:dct-method=<value>
1132
1133                    Selects  the  IJG  JPEG library DCT implementation to use.
1134                    The encoding implementations vary in  speed  and  encoding
1135                    error.  The  available choices for value are islow, ifast,
1136                    float, default and fastest. Note that  fastest  might  not
1137                    necessarily  be  fastest  on  your  CPU,  depending on the
1138                    choices made when the JPEG library was built and how  your
1139                    CPU behaves.
1140
1141               jpeg:fancy-upsampling={true|false}
1142
1143                    Enables  or  disables fancy upsampling when reading a JPEG
1144                    file (default enabled).
1145
1146               jpeg:max-scan-number=<value>
1147
1148                    Specifies an integer value for the maximum number of  pro‐
1149                    gressive  scans allowed in a JPEG file.  The default maxi‐
1150                    mum is 100 scans.  This limit is imposed due to a weakness
1151                    in the JPEG standard which allows small JPEG files to take
1152                    many minutes or hours to be read.
1153
1154               jpeg:max-warnings=<value>
1155
1156                    Specifies an integer  value  for  how  many  warnings  are
1157                    allowed  for any given error type before being promoted to
1158                    a hard error.  JPEG  files  producing  excessive  warnings
1159                    indicate a problem with the file.
1160
1161               jpeg:optimize-coding={true|false}
1162
1163                    Selects if huffman encoding should be used. Huffman encod‐
1164                    ing is enabled by default, but may be  disabled  for  very
1165                    large  images  since  it encoding requires that the entire
1166                    image be buffered in  memory.  Huffman  encoding  produces
1167                    smaller  JPEG  files  at  the expense of added compression
1168                    time and memory consumption.
1169
1170               jpeg:preserve-settings
1171
1172                    If the jpeg:preserve-settings flag is  defined,  the  JPEG
1173                    encoder  will use the same "quality" and "sampling-factor"
1174                    settings that were found in the input file, if  the  input
1175                    was  in  JPEG format. These settings are also preserved if
1176                    the input is a JPEG file and the output is a JNG file.  If
1177                    the colorspace of the output file differs from that of the
1178                    input file, the quality setting is preserved but the  sam‐
1179                    pling-factors are not.
1180
1181               pcl:fit-to-page
1182
1183                    If  the  pcl:fit-to-page flag is defined, then the printer
1184                    is requested to scale the  image  to  fit  the  page  size
1185                    (width and/or height).
1186               mng:maximum-loops=<value>
1187
1188                    mng:maximum-loops  specifies  the  maximum number of loops
1189                    allowed to be specified by a MNG LOOP  chunk.  Without  an
1190                    imposed  limit,  a MNG file could request up to 2147483647
1191                    loops, which could run for a very long time.  The  current
1192                    default limit is 512 loops.
1193
1194               pdf:use-cropbox={true|false}
1195
1196                    If  the  pdf:use-cropbox  flag is set to true, then Ghost‐
1197                    script is requested to apply the PDF crop box.
1198
1199               pdf:stop-on-error={true|false}
1200
1201                    If the pdf:stop-on-error flag is set to true, then  Ghost‐
1202                    script  is  requested  to stop processing the PDF when the
1203                    first error is encountered.  Otherwise it will attempt  to
1204                    process all requested pages.
1205
1206               ps:imagemask
1207
1208                    If  the  ps:imagemask  flag  is  defined, the PS3 and EPS3
1209                    coders will create Postscript files  that  render  bilevel
1210                    images  with  the Postscript imagemask operator instead of
1211                    the image operator.
1212
1213               ptif:minimum-geometry=<geometry>
1214
1215                    If the ptif:minimum-geometry key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1216                    ick  will  use  it  to determine the minimum frame size to
1217                    output when writing a pyramid TIFF file (a TIFF file  con‐
1218                    taining  a  succession  of  reduced  versions of the first
1219                    frame). The default minimum geometry is 32x32.
1220
1221               tiff:alpha={unspecified|associated|unassociated}
1222
1223                    Specify the TIFF alpha channel type when reading or  writ‐
1224                    ing  TIFF  files, overriding the normal value. The default
1225                    alpha channel type for new  files  is  unspecified  alpha.
1226                    Existing alpha settings are preserved when converting from
1227                    one TIFF file to another. When a TIFF file uses associated
1228                    alpha,  the image pixels are pre-multiplied (i.e. altered)
1229                    with the alpha  channel.  Files  with  "associated"  alpha
1230                    appear  as  if they were alpha composited on a black back‐
1231                    ground when the matte channel is disabled. If the  unasso‐
1232                    ciated  alpha  type is selected, then the alpha channel is
1233                    saved without altering the  pixels.  Photoshop  recognizes
1234                    associated  alpha as transparency information, if the file
1235                    is saved with unassociated alpha, the alpha information is
1236                    loaded  as  an  independent  channel.   Note that for many
1237                    years, ImageMagick and GraphicsMagick marked TIFF files as
1238                    using  associated  alpha, without properly pre-multiplying
1239                    the pixels.
1240
1241               tiff:fill-order={msb2lsb|lsb2msb}
1242
1243                    If the tiff:fill-order key is defined, GraphicsMagick will
1244                    use  it to determine the bit fill order used while writing
1245                    TIFF files. The normal default is "msb2lsb", which matches
1246                    the  native  bit order of all modern CPUs. The only excep‐
1247                    tion to this is when Group3 or Group4 FAX  compression  is
1248                    requested  since  FAX  machines  send data in bit-reversed
1249                    order and therefore  RFC  2301  recommends  using  reverse
1250                    order.
1251
1252               tiff:group-three-options=<value>
1253
1254                    If  the tiff:group-three-options key is defined, Graphics‐
1255                    Magick will use it to set  the  group3  options  tag  when
1256                    writing group3-compressed TIFF.  Please see the TIFF spec‐
1257                    ification for the usage of this tag.  The default value is
1258                    4.
1259
1260               tiff:ignore-tags=<tags>
1261
1262                    If the tiff:ignore-tags key is defined, then it is used as
1263                    a list of  comma-delimited  integer  TIFF  tag  values  to
1264                    ignore  while  reading  the  TIFF file.  This is useful in
1265                    order to be able to read files which which otherwise  fail
1266                    to  read  due  to problems with TIFF tags.  Note that some
1267                    TIFF tags are required in order to be  able  to  read  the
1268                    image data at all.
1269
1270               tiff:report-warnings={false|true}
1271
1272                    If  the  tiff:report-warnings  key  is  defined and set to
1273                    true, then TIFF warnings are reported as a warning  excep‐
1274                    tion  rather  than  as a coder log message.  Such warnings
1275                    are reported after the image has  been  read  or  written.
1276                    Most  TIFF warnings are benign but sometimes they may help
1277                    deduce problems with the TIFF file, or  help  detect  that
1278                    the  TIFF file requires a special application to read suc‐
1279                    cessfully due to the use  of  proprietary  or  specialized
1280                    extensions.
1281
1282               tiff:sample-format={unsigned|ieeefp}
1283
1284                    If  the  tiff:sample-format key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1285                    will use it to determine  the  sample  format  used  while
1286                    writing  TIFF  files.  The  default is "unsigned". Specify
1287                    "ieeefp" in order to write floating-point TIFF files  with
1288                    float   (32-bit)   or  double  (64-bit)  values.  Use  the
1289                    tiff:bits-per-sample  define  to  determine  the  type  of
1290                    floating-point value to use.
1291
1292               tiff:max-sample-value=<value>
1293
1294                    If  the tiff:max-sample-value key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1295                    ick will use the assigned value as  the  maximum  floating
1296                    point  value  while reading or writing IEEE floating point
1297                    TIFFs. Otherwise the maximum value is  1.0  or  the  value
1298                    obtained from the file's SMaxSampleValue tag (if present).
1299                    The floating  point  data  is  currently  not  scanned  in
1300                    advance to determine a best maximum sample value so if the
1301                    range is not  1.0,  or  the  SMaxSampleValue  tag  is  not
1302                    present,  it  may be necessary to (intelligently) use this
1303                    parameter to properly read a file.
1304
1305               tiff:min-sample-value=<value>
1306
1307                    If the tiff:min-sample-value key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1308                    ick  will  use  the assigned value as the minimum floating
1309                    point value while reading or writing IEEE  floating  point
1310                    TIFFs.  Otherwise  the  minimum  value is 0.0 or the value
1311                    obtained from the file's SMinSampleValue tag (if present).
1312
1313               tiff:bits-per-sample=<value>
1314
1315                    If the tiff:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1316                    will  write  images  with  the  specified bits per sample,
1317                    overriding any existing depth value. Value may be  any  in
1318                    the  range  of  1 to 32, or 64 when the default ´unsigned'
1319                    format is written, or  16/32/24/64  if  IEEEFP  format  is
1320                    written.   Please note that the baseline TIFF 6.0 specifi‐
1321                    cation only requires readers to handle certain  powers  of
1322                    two,  and the values to be handled depend on the nature of
1323                    the image (e.g. colormapped, grayscale, RGB, CMYK).
1324
1325               tiff:samples-per-pixel=<value>
1326
1327                    If the tiff:samples-per-pixel key is defined to  a  value,
1328                    the  TIFF  coder  will  write TIFF images with the defined
1329                    samples per pixel, overriding  any  value  stored  in  the
1330                    image. This option should not normally be used.
1331
1332               tiff:rows-per-strip=<value>
1333
1334                    Allows  the  user  to  specify the number of rows per TIFF
1335                    strip.  Rounded up to a multiple of  16  when  using  JPEG
1336                    compression. Ignored when using tiles.
1337
1338               tiff:strip-per-page=true
1339
1340                    Requests that the image is written in a single TIFF strip.
1341                    This is normally the default when group3  or  group4  com‐
1342                    pression is requested within reasonable limits. Requesting
1343                    a single strip for large images may result in failure  due
1344                    to resource consumption in the writer or reader.
1345
1346               tiff:tile
1347
1348                    Enable writing tiled TIFF (rather than stripped) using the
1349                    default tile size. Tiled TIFF organizes the  image  as  an
1350                    array  of smaller images (tiles) in order to enable random
1351                    access.
1352
1353               tiff:tile-geometry=<width>x<height>
1354
1355                    Specify the tile size to use  while  writing  tiled  TIFF.
1356                    Width  and height should be a multiple of 16. If the value
1357                    is not a multiple of 16, then it  will  be  rounded  down.
1358                    Enables  tiled  TIFF  if  it has not already been enabled.
1359                    GraphicsMagick does not use tiled  storage  internally  so
1360                    tiles  need to be converted back and forth from the inter‐
1361                    nal scanline-oriented storage  to  tile-oriented  storage.
1362                    Testing  with  typical RGB images shows that useful square
1363                    tile size values range from 128x128  to  1024x1024.  Large
1364                    images  which require using a disk-based pixel cache bene‐
1365                    fit from large tile sizes while images which fit in memory
1366                    work well with smaller tile sizes.
1367
1368               tiff:tile-width=<width>
1369
1370                    Specify  the  tile  width to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1371                    The tile height is then defaulted to an appropriate  size.
1372                    Width  should  be  a multiple of 16. If the value is not a
1373                    multiple of 16, then it will  be  rounded  down.   Enables
1374                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1375
1376               tiff:tile-height=<height>
1377
1378                    Specify  the  tile height to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1379                    The tile width is then defaulted to an  appropriate  size.
1380                    Height  should  be a multiple of 16. If the value is not a
1381                    multiple of 16, then it will  be  rounded  down.   Enables
1382                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1383
1384               tiff:webp-lossless={TRUE|FALSE}
1385
1386                    Specify  a  value  of  TRUE  to enable lossless mode while
1387                    writing WebP-compressed TIFF files. The WebP webp:lossless
1388                    option  may  also  be used.  The quality factor set by the
1389                    -quality option may be used  to  influence  the  level  of
1390                    effort expended while compressing.
1391
1392               tiff:zstd-compress-level=<value>
1393
1394                    Specify  the  compression level to use while writing Zstd-
1395                    compressed TIFF files. The valid range is 1 to 22. If this
1396                    define  is not specified, then the 'quality' value is used
1397                    such that the default quality setting of 75 is  translated
1398                    to  a compress level of 9 such that ´quality' has a useful
1399                    range of 10-184 if used for this purpose.
1400
1401               webp:lossless={true|false}
1402
1403                    Enable lossless encoding.
1404
1405               webp:method={0-6}
1406
1407                    Quality/speed trade-off.
1408
1409               webp:image-hint={default,graph,photo,picture}
1410
1411                    Hint for image type.
1412
1413               webp:target-size=<integer>
1414
1415                    Target size in bytes.
1416
1417               webp:target-psnr=<float>
1418
1419                    Minimal distortion to try to achieve.
1420
1421               webp:segments={1-4}
1422
1423                    Maximum number of segments to use.
1424
1425               webp:sns-strength={0-100}
1426
1427                    Spatial Noise Shaping.
1428
1429               webp:filter-strength={0-100}
1430
1431                    Filter strength.
1432
1433               webp:filter-sharpness={0-7}
1434
1435                    Filter sharpness.
1436
1437               webp:filter-type={0,1}
1438
1439                    Filtering type. 0 = simple, 1 = strong (only used if  fil‐
1440                    ter-strength > 0 or autofilter is enabled).
1441
1442               webp:auto-filter={true|false}
1443
1444                    Auto adjust filter's strength.
1445
1446               webp:alpha-compression=<integer>
1447
1448                    Algorithm for encoding the alpha plane (0 = none, 1 = com‐
1449                    pressed with WebP lossless). Default is 1.
1450
1451               webp:alpha-filtering=<integer>
1452
1453                    Predictive filtering method for alpha plane. 0:  none,  1:
1454                    fast, 2: best. Default is 1.
1455
1456               webp:alpha-quality={0-100}
1457
1458                    Between  0  (smallest size) and 100 (lossless). Default is
1459                    100.
1460
1461               webp:pass=[1..10]
1462
1463                    Number of entropy-analysis passes.
1464
1465               webp:show-compressed={true|false}
1466
1467                    Export the compressed picture back.  In-loop filtering  is
1468                    not applied.
1469
1470               webp:preprocessing=[0,1,2]
1471
1472                    0=none, 1=segment-smooth, 2=pseudo-random dithering
1473
1474               webp:partitions=[0-3]
1475
1476                    log2(number  of token partitions) in [0..3].  Default is 0
1477                    for easier progressive decoding.
1478
1479               webp:partition-limit={0-100}
1480
1481                    Quality degradation allowed to fit the 512k limit on  pre‐
1482                    diction modes coding (0: no degradation, 100: maximum pos‐
1483                    sible degradation).
1484
1485               webp:emulate-jpeg-size={true|false}
1486
1487                    If true, compression parameters will be remapped to better
1488                    match the expected output size from JPEG compression. Gen‐
1489                    erally, the output size will be similar but  the  degrada‐
1490                    tion will be lower.
1491
1492               webp:thread-level=<integer>
1493
1494                    If non-zero, try and use multi-threaded encoding.
1495
1496               webp:low-memory={true|false}
1497
1498                    If set, reduce memory usage (but increase CPU use)
1499
1500               webp:use-sharp-yuv={true|false}
1501
1502                    If  set,  if needed, use sharp (and slow) RGB->YUV conver‐
1503                    sion
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508               For example, to create a postscript file that will render  only
1509               the black pixels of a bilevel image, use:
1510
1511                   gm convert bilevel.tif -define ps:imagemask eps3:stencil.ps
1512
1513
1514       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
1515              display the next image after pausing
1516
1517              This  option  is  useful  for  regulating the animation of image
1518              sequences Delay/100 seconds must expire before  the  display  of
1519              the  next image. The default is no delay between each showing of
1520              the image sequence. The maximum delay is 65535.
1521
1522              You can specify a delay range (e.g. -delay  10-500)  which  sets
1523              the minimum and maximum delay.
1524
1525       -density <width>x<height>
1526              horizontal  and  vertical resolution in pixels of the image This
1527              option specifies the image resolution to store while encoding  a
1528              raster  image or the canvas resolution while rendering (reading)
1529              vector formats such as Postscript, PDF,  WMF,  and  SVG  into  a
1530              raster  image.  Image resolution provides the unit of measure to
1531              apply when rendering to an output device or  raster  image.  The
1532              default  unit  of  measure is in dots per inch (DPI). The -units
1533              option may be used to select dots per centimeter instead.
1534               The default resolution is 72 dots per inch, which is equivalent
1535              to one point per pixel (Macintosh and Postscript standard). Com‐
1536              puter screens are normally 72 or 96 dots per inch while printers
1537              typically  support  150,  300,  600,  or  1200 dots per inch. To
1538              determine the resolution of your display, use a ruler to measure
1539              the  width of your screen in inches, and divide by the number of
1540              horizontal pixels (1024 on a 1024x768  display).   If  the  file
1541              format supports it, this option may be used to update the stored
1542              image resolution. Note that Photoshop stores and  obtains  image
1543              resolution  from a proprietary embedded profile. If this profile
1544              is not stripped from the image, then Photoshop will continue  to
1545              treat  the image using its former resolution, ignoring the image
1546              resolution specified in the standard file header.   The  density
1547              option  is an attribute and does not alter the underlying raster
1548              image. It may be used to adjust the rendered  size  for  desktop
1549              publishing  purposes  by adjusting the scale applied to the pix‐
1550              els. To resize the image so that it is the same size at  a  dif‐
1551              ferent resolution, use the -resample option.
1552
1553       -depth <value>
1554              depth of the image
1555
1556              This  is  the  number of bits of color to preserve in the image.
1557              Any value between 1 and QuantumDepth (build option) may be spec‐
1558              ified,  although  8  or  16 are the most common values. Use this
1559              option to specify the depth of raw images whose depth is unknown
1560              such  as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK, or to change the depth of any image
1561              after it has been read.  The depth option is applied to the pix‐
1562              els  immediately  so it may be used as a form of simple compres‐
1563              sion by discarding the  least  significant  bits.  Reducing  the
1564              depth  in advance may speed up color quantization, and help cre‐
1565              ate smaller file sizes when using a compression  algorithm  like
1566              LZW or ZIP.
1567
1568       -descend
1569              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
1570
1571       -despeckle
1572              reduce the speckles within an image
1573
1574       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
1575              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
1576
1577              With this option, composite image is used as a displacement map.
1578              Black, within the displacement map, is a maximum  positive  dis‐
1579              placement.   White is a maximum negative displacement and middle
1580              gray is neutral.  The displacement is scaled  to  determine  the
1581              pixel  shift.   By default, the displacement applies in both the
1582              horizontal and vertical directions.   However,  if  you  specify
1583              mask,  composite image is the horizontal X displacement and mask
1584              the vertical Y displacement.
1585
1586       -display <host:display[.screen]>
1587              specifies the X server to contact
1588
1589              This option is used with convert for  obtaining  image  or  font
1590              from this X server.  See X(1).
1591
1592       -dispose <method>
1593              GIF disposal method
1594
1595              The Disposal Method indicates the way in which the graphic is to
1596              be treated after being displayed.
1597
1598              Here are the valid methods:
1599
1600                  Undefined       No disposal specified.
1601                  None            Do not dispose between frames.
1602                  Background      Overwrite the image area with
1603                                  the background color.
1604                  Previous        Overwrite the image area with
1605                                  what was there prior to rendering
1606                                  the image.
1607
1608
1609       -dissolve <percent>
1610              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
1611
1612              The opacity of the composite image is multiplied  by  the  given
1613              percent, then it is composited over the main image.
1614
1615       -dither
1616              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
1617
1618              The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity resolution
1619              for spatial resolution by averaging the intensities  of  several
1620              neighboring  pixels.  Images which suffer from severe contouring
1621              when reducing colors can be improved with this option.
1622
1623              The -colors or -monochrome option is required for this option to
1624              take effect.
1625
1626              Use +dither to turn off dithering and to render PostScript with‐
1627              out text or graphic aliasing. Disabling dithering often (but not
1628              always) leads to decreased processing time.
1629
1630       -draw <string>
1631              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
1632
1633              Use  this  option  to annotate an image with one or more graphic
1634              primitives.  The primitives include  shapes,  text,  transforma‐
1635              tions, and pixel operations.  The shape primitives are
1636
1637                   point           x,y
1638                   line            x0,y0 x1,y1
1639                   rectangle       x0,y0 x1,y1
1640                   roundRectangle  x0,y0 x1,y1 wc,hc
1641                   arc             x0,y0 x1,y1 a0,a1
1642                   ellipse         x0,y0 rx,ry a0,a1
1643                   circle          x0,y0 x1,y1
1644                   polyline        x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1645                   polygon         x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1646                   Bezier          x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1647                   path            path specification
1648                   image           operator x0,y0 w,h filename
1649
1650
1651              The text primitive is
1652
1653                   text            x0,y0 string
1654
1655
1656              The text gravity primitive is
1657
1658                   gravity         NorthWest, North, NorthEast, West, Center,
1659                                   East, SouthWest, South, or SouthEast
1660
1661
1662              The  text  gravity  primitive only affects the placement of text
1663              and does not interact with the other primitives.  It is  equiva‐
1664              lent to using the -gravity commandline option, except that it is
1665              limited in scope to the -draw option in which it appears.
1666
1667              The transformation primitives are
1668
1669                   rotate          degrees
1670                   translate       dx,dy
1671                   scale           sx,sy
1672                   skewX           degrees
1673                   skewY           degrees
1674
1675
1676              The pixel operation primitives are
1677
1678                   color           x0,y0 method
1679                   matte           x0,y0 method
1680
1681
1682              The shape primitives are drawn in the  color  specified  in  the
1683              preceding  -stroke  option. Except for the line and point primi‐
1684              tives, they are filled with the color specified in the preceding
1685              -fill option.  For unfilled shapes, use -fill none.
1686
1687              Point requires a single coordinate.
1688
1689              Line requires a start and end coordinate.
1690
1691              Rectangle expects an upper left and lower right coordinate.
1692
1693              RoundRectangle  has  the  upper left and lower right coordinates
1694              and the width and height of the corners.
1695
1696              Circle has a center coordinate and a coordinate  for  the  outer
1697              edge.
1698
1699              Use  Arc to inscribe an elliptical arc within a rectangle.  Arcs
1700              require a start and end point as well as the degree of  rotation
1701              (e.g. 130,30 200,100 45,90).
1702
1703              Use  Ellipse  to  draw  a  partial ellipse centered at the given
1704              point with the x-axis and y-axis radius and start and end of arc
1705              in degrees (e.g. 100,100 100,150 0,360).
1706
1707              Finally,  polyline and polygon require three or more coordinates
1708              to define its boundaries.  Coordinates are integers separated by
1709              an  optional comma.  For example, to define a circle centered at
1710              100,100 that extends to 150,150 use:
1711
1712                   -draw 'circle 100,100 150,150'
1713
1714
1715              Paths (See Paths) represent an outline of  an  object  which  is
1716              defined  in  terms  of  moveto (set a new current point), lineto
1717              (draw a straight line), curveto (draw  a  curve  using  a  cubic
1718              Bezier),  arc  (elliptical or circular arc) and closepath (close
1719              the current shape by drawing a line to  the  last  moveto)  ele‐
1720              ments. Compound paths (i.e., a path with subpaths, each consist‐
1721              ing of a single moveto followed by one or  more  line  or  curve
1722              operations)  are possible to allow effects such as "donut holes"
1723              in objects.
1724
1725              Use image to composite an image with another image.  Follow  the
1726              image keyword with the composite operator, image location, image
1727              size, and filename:
1728
1729                   -draw 'image Over 100,100 225,225 image.jpg'
1730
1731
1732              You can use 0,0 for the image  size,  which  means  to  use  the
1733              actual  dimensions found in the image header. Otherwise, it will
1734              be scaled to the given dimensions.  See -compose for a  descrip‐
1735              tion of the composite operators.
1736
1737              Use text to annotate an image with text. Follow the text coordi‐
1738              nates with a string. If the string has embedded spaces,  enclose
1739              it  in  single  or double quotes. Optionally you can include the
1740              image filename, type, width, height, or other image attribute by
1741              embedding special format character. See -comment for details.
1742
1743              For example,
1744
1745
1746                   -draw 'text 100,100 "%m:%f %wx%h"'
1747
1748
1749              annotates  the  image  with  MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
1750              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
1751
1752              If the first character of string is @, the text is read  from  a
1753              file  titled  by the remaining characters in the string.  Please
1754              note that if the string comes from an untrusted source  that  it
1755              should be sanitized before use (a security risk).
1756
1757              Rotate  rotates  subsequent shape primitives and text primitives
1758              about the origin of the main image. If the -region  option  pre‐
1759              cedes  the  -draw  option, the origin for transformations is the
1760              upper left corner of the region.
1761
1762              Translate translates them.
1763
1764              Scale scales them.
1765
1766              SkewX and SkewY skew them with respect to the origin of the main
1767              image or the region.
1768
1769              The  transformations  modify the current affine matrix, which is
1770              initialized from  the  initial  affine  matrix  defined  by  the
1771              -affine option.  Transformations are cumulative within the -draw
1772              option.  The initial affine matrix is not affected; that  matrix
1773              is only changed by the appearance of another -affine option.  If
1774              another -draw option  appears,  the  current  affine  matrix  is
1775              reinitialized from the initial affine matrix.
1776
1777              Use  color to change the color of a pixel to the fill color (see
1778              -fill). Follow the pixel coordinate with a method:
1779
1780                   point
1781                   replace
1782                   floodfill
1783                   filltoborder
1784                   reset
1785
1786
1787              Consider the target pixel as that specified by your  coordinate.
1788              The  point  method recolors the target pixel. The replace method
1789              recolors any pixel that matches the color of the  target  pixel.
1790              Floodfill  recolors any pixel that matches the color of the tar‐
1791              get pixel and is a neighbor, whereas filltoborder  recolors  any
1792              neighbor  pixel  that  is  not  the border color. Finally, reset
1793              recolors all pixels.
1794
1795              Use matte to the change the pixel matte  value  to  transparent.
1796              Follow  the pixel coordinate with a method (see the color primi‐
1797              tive for a description of methods). The point method changes the
1798              matte  value of the target pixel. The replace method changes the
1799              matte value of any pixel that matches the color  of  the  target
1800              pixel.  Floodfill  changes  the  matte  value  of any pixel that
1801              matches the color of the target pixel and is a neighbor, whereas
1802              filltoborder  changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel that
1803              is not the border color (-bordercolor).  Finally  reset  changes
1804              the matte value of all pixels.
1805
1806              You  can  set  the  primitive color, font, and font bounding box
1807              color with -fill, -font, and -box respectively. Options are pro‐
1808              cessed  in  command  line  order so be sure to use these options
1809              before the -draw option.
1810
1811       -edge <radius>
1812              detect edges within an image
1813
1814       -emboss <radius>
1815              emboss an image
1816
1817       -encoding <type>
1818              specify the text encoding
1819
1820              Choose from AdobeCustom, AdobeExpert, AdobeStandard, AppleRoman,
1821              BIG5, GB2312, Latin 2, None, SJIScode, Symbol, Unicode, Wansung.
1822
1823       -endian <type>
1824              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
1825
1826              MSB  indicates  big-endian  (e.g. SPARC, Motorola 68K) while LSB
1827              indicates little-endian (e.g. Intel 'x86,  VAX)  byte  ordering.
1828              Native indicates to use the normal ordering for the current CPU.
1829              This option currently only influences the CMYK, DPX, GRAY,  RGB,
1830              and TIFF, formats.
1831
1832              Use +endian to revert to unspecified endianness.
1833
1834       -enhance
1835              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
1836
1837       -equalize
1838              perform histogram equalization to the image
1839
1840       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
1841              composite image on background color canvas image
1842
1843              This  option  composites  the  image  on  a new background color
1844              (-background) canvas image of size <width>x<height>. The  exist‐
1845              ing  image  content  is  composited at the position specified by
1846              geometry x and y offset and/or desired gravity (-gravity)  using
1847              the  current  image  compose  (-compose)  method.  Image content
1848              which falls outside the bounds of the new  image  dimensions  is
1849              discarded.
1850
1851              For  example,  this command creates a thumbnail of an image, and
1852              centers it on a red color backdrop image, offsetting the  canvas
1853              ten  pixels  to the left and five pixels up, with respect to the
1854              thumbnail:
1855
1856                  gm convert  infile.jpg  -thumbnail  120x80  -background  red
1857              -gravity center \
1858                            -extent 140x100-10-5 outfile.jpg
1859
1860
1861              This  command  reduces  or  expands  a  JPEG  image to fit on an
1862              800x600 display:
1863
1864                  gm convert -size 800x600 input.jpg \
1865                            -resize 800x600 -background black \
1866                            -compose Copy -gravity center \
1867                            -extent 800x600 \
1868                            -quality 92 output.jpg
1869
1870
1871              If the aspect ratio of the input image isn't exactly  4:3,  then
1872              the image is centered on an 800x600 black canvas.
1873
1874       -file <filename>
1875              write annotated difference image to file
1876
1877              If  -file  is  specified,  then an annotated difference image is
1878              generated and written to the specified file. Pixels which differ
1879              between the reference and compare images are modified from those
1880              in the compare image so that  the  changed  pixels  become  more
1881              obvious.   Some  images  may require use of an alternative high‐
1882              light style  (see  -highlight-style)  or  highlight  color  (see
1883              -highlight-color) before the changes are obvious.
1884
1885       -fill <color>
1886              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
1887
1888              Colors  are  represented in GraphicsMagick in the same form used
1889              by SVG. Use "gm convert -list color" to list named colors:
1890
1891                  name               (named color)
1892                  #RGB               (hex numbers, 4 bits each)
1893                  #RRGGBB            (8 bits each)
1894                  #RRRGGGBBB         (12 bits each)
1895                  #RRRRGGGGBBBB      (16 bits each)
1896                  #RGBA              (4 bits each)
1897                  #RRGGBBAA          (8 bits each)
1898                  #RRRGGGBBBAAA      (12 bits each)
1899                  #RRRRGGGGBBBBAAAA  (16 bits each)
1900                  rgb(r,g,b)         (r,g,b are decimal numbers)
1901                  rgba(r,g,b,a)      (r,g,b,a are decimal numbers)
1902
1903
1904              Enclose the color specification in quotation  marks  to  prevent
1905              the "#" or the parentheses from being interpreted by your shell.
1906
1907              For example,
1908
1909                  gm convert -fill blue ...
1910                  gm convert -fill "#ddddff" ...
1911                  gm convert -fill "rgb(65000,65000,65535)" ...
1912
1913
1914              The  shorter  forms  are scaled up, if necessary by replication.
1915              For example, #3af, #33aaff, and #3333aaaaffff  are  all  equiva‐
1916              lent.
1917
1918              See -draw for further details.
1919
1920       -filter <type>
1921              use this type of filter when resizing an image
1922
1923              Use  this  option  to  affect the resizing operation of an image
1924              (see -geometry).  Choose from these filters (ordered by approxi‐
1925              mate increasing CPU time):
1926
1927                   Point
1928                   Box
1929                   Triangle
1930                   Hermite
1931                   Hanning
1932                   Hamming
1933                   Blackman
1934                   Gaussian
1935                   Quadratic
1936                   Cubic
1937                   Catrom
1938                   Mitchell
1939                   Lanczos
1940                   Bessel
1941                   Sinc
1942
1943
1944              The default filter is automatically selected to provide the best
1945              quality  while  consuming  a  reasonable  amount  of  time.  The
1946              Mitchell  filter  is  used if the image supports a palette, sup‐
1947              ports a matte channel, or is being enlarged, otherwise the Lanc‐
1948              zos filter is used.
1949
1950       -flatten
1951              flatten a sequence of images
1952
1953              In  some  file formats (e.g. Photoshop's PSD) complex images may
1954              be represented by "layers" (independent images)  which  must  be
1955              composited in order to obtain the final rendition.  The -flatten
1956              option accomplishes this composition.  The sequence of images is
1957              replaced  by a single image created by compositing each image in
1958              turn, while respecting composition operators and  page  offsets.
1959              While  -flatten is immediately useful for eliminating layers, it
1960              is also useful as a general-purpose composition tool.
1961
1962              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1963              option.   If  the -flatten option appears after all of the input
1964              images, all images are flattened.  Also  see  -mosaic  which  is
1965              similar  to -flatten except that it adds a suitably-sized canvas
1966              base image.
1967
1968              For example, this composites an image on top of a 640x400 trans‐
1969              parent black canvas image:
1970
1971                  gm convert -size 640x300 xc:transparent \
1972                            -compose over -page +0-100 \
1973                            frame.png -flatten output.png
1974
1975
1976              and this flattens a Photoshop PSD file:
1977
1978                  gm convert input.psd -flatten output.png
1979
1980
1981       -flip  create a "mirror image"
1982
1983              reflect the scanlines in the vertical direction.
1984
1985       -flop  create a "mirror image"
1986
1987              reflect the scanlines in the horizontal direction.
1988
1989       -font <name>
1990              use this font when annotating the image with text
1991
1992              You  can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
1993              Type, or X11 font.  For example, Arial.ttf is a  TrueType  font,
1994              ps:helvetica is PostScript, and x:fixed is X11.
1995
1996       -foreground <color>
1997              define the foreground color
1998
1999              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
2000              -fill option.
2001
2002       -format <type>
2003              the image format type
2004
2005              When used with the mogrify utility, this option will convert any
2006              image  to  the  image format you specify.  See GraphicsMagick(1)
2007              for a list of image format types supported by GraphicsMagick, or
2008              see the output of 'gm -list format'.
2009
2010              By  default  the file is written to its original name.  However,
2011              if the filename extension matches a supported format, the exten‐
2012              sion is replaced with the image format type specified with -for‐
2013              mat.  For example, if you specify tiff as the  format  type  and
2014              the input image filename is image.gif, the output image filename
2015              becomes image.tiff.
2016
2017       -format <string>
2018              output formatted image characteristics
2019
2020              When used with the identify utility, or the convert utility with
2021              output  written  to  the  'info:-'  file specification, use this
2022              option to print information about the image in a format of  your
2023              choosing.   You  can  include  the  image filename, type, width,
2024              height, Exif data, or other image attributes by  embedding  spe‐
2025              cial format characters:
2026
2027                   %b   file size
2028                   %c   comment
2029                   %d   directory
2030                   %e   filename extension
2031                   %f   filename
2032                   %g   page dimensions and offsets
2033                   %h   height
2034                   %i   input filename
2035                   %k   number of unique colors
2036                   %l   label
2037                   %m   magick
2038                   %n   number of scenes
2039                   %o   output filename
2040                   %p   page number
2041                   %q   image bit depth
2042                   %r   image type description
2043                   %s   scene number
2044                   %t   top of filename
2045                   %u   unique temporary filename
2046                   %w   width
2047                   %x   horizontal resolution
2048                   %y   vertical resolution
2049                   %A   transparency supported
2050                   %C   compression type
2051                   %D   GIF disposal method
2052                   %G   Original width and height
2053                   %H   page height
2054                   %M   original filename specification
2055                   %O   page offset (x,y)
2056                   %P   page dimensions (width,height)
2057                   %Q   compression quality
2058                   %T   time delay (in centi-seconds)
2059                   %U   resolution units
2060                   %W   page width
2061                   %X   page horizontal offset (x)
2062                   %Y   page vertical offset (y)
2063                   %@   trim bounding box
2064                   %#   signature
2065                   \n   newline
2066                   \r   carriage return
2067                   %%   %
2068
2069
2070              For example,
2071
2072                   -format "%m:%f %wx%h"
2073
2074
2075              displays  MIFF:bird.miff  512x480  for an image titled bird.miff
2076              and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2077
2078              If the first character of string is @, the format is read from a
2079              file  titled  by the remaining characters in the string.  Please
2080              note that if the string comes from an untrusted source  that  it
2081              should  be sanitized before use since this may be used to incor‐
2082              porate any readable file on the system (a security risk).
2083
2084              The values of image type (%r) which may be returned include:
2085
2086                   Bilevel
2087                   Grayscale
2088                   GrayscaleMatte
2089                   Palette
2090                   PaletteMatte
2091                   TrueColor
2092                   TrueColorMatte
2093                   ColorSeparation
2094                   ColorSeparationMatte
2095                   Optimize
2096
2097
2098              You can also use the  following  special  formatting  syntax  to
2099              print Exif information contained in the file:
2100
2101                   %[EXIF:<tag>]
2102
2103
2104              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2105
2106                   *  (print all Exif tags, in keyword=data format)
2107                   !  (print all Exif tags, in tag_number format)
2108                   #hhhh (print data for Exif tag #hhhh)
2109                   ImageWidth
2110                   ImageLength
2111                   BitsPerSample
2112                   Compression
2113                   PhotometricInterpretation
2114                   FillOrder
2115                   DocumentName
2116                   ImageDescription
2117                   Make
2118                   Model
2119                   StripOffsets
2120                   Orientation
2121                   SamplesPerPixel
2122                   RowsPerStrip
2123                   StripByteCounts
2124                   XResolution
2125                   YResolution
2126                   PlanarConfiguration
2127                   ResolutionUnit
2128                   TransferFunction
2129                   Software
2130                   DateTime
2131                   Artist
2132                   WhitePoint
2133                   PrimaryChromaticities
2134                   TransferRange
2135                   JPEGProc
2136                   JPEGInterchangeFormat
2137                   JPEGInterchangeFormatLength
2138                   YCbCrCoefficients
2139                   YCbCrSubSampling
2140                   YCbCrPositioning
2141                   ReferenceBlackWhite
2142                   CFARepeatPatternDim
2143                   CFAPattern
2144                   BatteryLevel
2145                   Copyright
2146                   ExposureTime
2147                   FNumber
2148                   IPTC/NAA
2149                   ExifOffset
2150                   InterColorProfile
2151                   ExposureProgram
2152                   SpectralSensitivity
2153                   GPSInfo
2154                   ISOSpeedRatings
2155                   OECF
2156                   ExifVersion
2157                   DateTimeOriginal
2158                   DateTimeDigitized
2159                   ComponentsConfiguration
2160                   CompressedBitsPerPixel
2161                   ShutterSpeedValue
2162                   ApertureValue
2163                   BrightnessValue
2164                   ExposureBiasValue
2165                   MaxApertureValue
2166                   SubjectDistance
2167                   MeteringMode
2168                   LightSource
2169                   Flash
2170                   FocalLength
2171                   MakerNote
2172                   UserComment
2173                   SubSecTime
2174                   SubSecTimeOriginal
2175                   SubSecTimeDigitized
2176                   FlashPixVersion
2177                   ColorSpace
2178                   ExifImageWidth
2179                   ExifImageLength
2180                   InteroperabilityOffset
2181                   FlashEnergy
2182                   SpatialFrequencyResponse
2183                   FocalPlaneXResolution
2184                   FocalPlaneYResolution
2185                   FocalPlaneResolutionUnit
2186                   SubjectLocation
2187                   ExposureIndex
2188                   SensingMethod
2189                   FileSource
2190                   SceneType
2191
2192
2193              JPEG  specific  information  (from  reading  a JPEG file) may be
2194              obtained like this:
2195
2196                   %[JPEG-<tag>]
2197
2198
2199              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2200
2201                   *                 (all JPEG-related tags, in
2202                                      keyword=data format)
2203                   Quality           IJG JPEG "quality" estimate
2204                   Colorspace        JPEG colorspace numeric ID
2205                   Colorspace-Name   JPEG colorspace name
2206                   Sampling-factors  JPEG sampling factors
2207
2208
2209              Please note that JPEG has no notion of "quality"  and  that  the
2210              quality  metric  used by, and estimated by the software is based
2211              on the  quality  metric  established  by  IJG  JPEG  6b.   Other
2212              encoders  (e.g.  that  used  by  Adobe  Photoshop) use different
2213              encoding metrics.
2214
2215              Surround the format specification with quotation marks  to  pre‐
2216              vent  your  shell  from  misinterpreting  any  spaces and square
2217              brackets.
2218
2219       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
2220              surround the image with an ornamental border
2221
2222              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.  The
2223              -frame option is not affected by the -gravity option.
2224
2225              The  color  of the border is specified with the -mattecolor com‐
2226              mand line option.
2227
2228       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
2229
2230       -fuzz <distance>{%}
2231              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
2232
2233              A number of algorithms search for a target color. By default the
2234              color  must  be  exact. Use this option to match colors that are
2235              close (in Euclidean distance) to the  target  color  in  RGB  3D
2236              space.  For example, if you want to automatically trim the edges
2237              of an image with -trim but the image was scanned and the  target
2238              background  color  may differ by a small amount. This option can
2239              account for these differences.
2240
2241              The distance can be in absolute intensity units or, by appending
2242              "%",  as  a  percentage  of the maximum possible intensity (255,
2243              65535, or 4294967295).
2244
2245       -gamma <value>
2246              level of gamma correction
2247
2248              The same color image displayed on two different workstations may
2249              look  different  due  to differences in the display monitor. Use
2250              gamma correction to adjust for this color difference. Reasonable
2251              values  extend  from 0.8 to 2.3. Gamma less than 1.0 darkens the
2252              image and gamma greater than 1.0 lightens it. Large  adjustments
2253              to  image gamma may result in the loss of some image information
2254              if the pixel quantum size is only eight bits (quantum range 0 to
2255              255).
2256
2257              You  can apply separate gamma values to the red, green, and blue
2258              channels of the image with a gamma  value  list  delimited  with
2259              slashes (e.g., 1.7/2.3/1.2).
2260
2261              Use  +gamma  value to set the image gamma level without actually
2262              adjusting the image pixels. This option is useful if  the  image
2263              is  of a known gamma but not set as an image attribute (e.g. PNG
2264              images).
2265
2266       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
2267              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
2268
2269              Use the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
2270
2271       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
2272              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
2273
2274              The -geometry option is used for a number of different purposes,
2275              depending on the utility it is used with.
2276
2277              For  the  X11  commands ('animate', 'display', and 'import'), it
2278              specifies the preferred size and location of the  Image  window.
2279              By  default,  the window size is the image size and the location
2280              is chosen by you (or your window manager) when it is mapped.
2281               For the 'import', 'convert', 'mogrify' utility commands it  may
2282              be  used to specify the desired size when resizing an image.  In
2283              this case, symbols representing resize options may  be  appended
2284              to  the  geometry  string to influence how the resize request is
2285              treated.
2286
2287              See later notes corresponding to usage by  particular  commands.
2288              The following notes apply to when -geometry is used to express a
2289              resize request, taking into account the  current  properties  of
2290              the image.
2291
2292              By  default,  the  width and height are maximum values. That is,
2293              the image is expanded or contracted to fit the width and  height
2294              value while maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.
2295
2296              Append  a  ^  to  the geometry so that the image aspect ratio is
2297              maintained when the image is resized, but the resulting width or
2298              height are treated as minimum values rather than maximum values.
2299
2300              Append  a  !  (exclamation  point)  to the geometry to force the
2301              image size to exactly the size you specify. For example, if  you
2302              specify 640x480! the image width is set to 640 pixels and height
2303              to 480.
2304
2305              If only the width is specified, without the trailing  'x',  then
2306              height  is  set  to  width  (e.g.,  -geometry 100 is the same as
2307              -geometry 100x100).  If only the width is specified but with the
2308              trailing  'x',  then  width  assumes the value and the height is
2309              chosen to maintain the aspect ratio of the image.  Similarly, if
2310              only  the  height  is specified prefixed by 'x' (e.g., -geometry
2311              x256), the width is chosen to maintain the aspect ratio.
2312
2313              To specify a percentage width or height instead, append  %.  The
2314              image  size is multiplied by the width and height percentages to
2315              obtain the final image dimensions. To increase the  size  of  an
2316              image,  use a value greater than 100 (e.g. 125%). To decrease an
2317              image's size, use a percentage less than 100.
2318
2319              Use @ to specify the maximum area in pixels of an image.
2320
2321              Use > to change the dimensions of the image only if its width or
2322              height  exceeds  the geometry specification. < resizes the image
2323              only if both of its dimensions are less than the geometry speci‐
2324              fication.  For  example, if you specify '640x480>' and the image
2325              size is 256x256, the image size does not change. However, if the
2326              image  is  512x512  or  1024x1024,  it  is  resized  to 480x480.
2327              Enclose the geometry specification in quotation marks to prevent
2328              the  < or > from being interpreted by your shell as a file redi‐
2329              rection.
2330
2331              When used with animate and display, offsets are handled  in  the
2332              same  manner as in X(1) and the -gravity option is not used.  If
2333              the x is negative, the offset  is  measured  leftward  from  the
2334              right  edge  of  the screen to the right edge of the image being
2335              displayed.  Similarly, negative y is measured between the bottom
2336              edges.   The  offsets  are  not affected by "%"; they are always
2337              measured in pixels.
2338
2339              When used as a composite option, -geometry gives the  dimensions
2340              of  the  image  and  its  location with respect to the composite
2341              image.  If the -gravity option is present with NorthEast,  East,
2342              or  SouthEast  gravity,  the  x represents the distance from the
2343              right edge of the image to  the  right  edge  of  the  composite
2344              image.  Similarly, if the -gravity option is present with South‐
2345              West, South, or SouthEast gravity, y  is  measured  between  the
2346              bottom edges. Accordingly, a positive offset will never point in
2347              the direction  outside  of  the  image.   The  offsets  are  not
2348              affected by "%"; they are always measured in pixels.  To specify
2349              the dimensions of the composite image, use the -resize option.
2350
2351              When used as a convert, import or mogrify option,  -geometry  is
2352              synonymous  with  -resize  and  specifies the size of the output
2353              image.  The offsets, if present, are ignored.
2354
2355              When used as a montage option,  -geometry  specifies  the  image
2356              size  and  border  size  for  each tile; default is 256x256+0+0.
2357              Negative  offsets  (border  dimensions)  are  meaningless.   The
2358              -gravity  option  affects  the placement of the image within the
2359              tile; the default gravity for this purpose is  Center.   If  the
2360              "%" sign appears in the geometry specification, the tile size is
2361              the specified percentage of the original dimensions of the first
2362              tile.  To specify the dimensions of the montage, use the -resize
2363              option.
2364
2365       -gravity <type>
2366              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
2367
2368              Choices are: NorthWest, North, NorthEast,  West,  Center,  East,
2369              SouthWest, South, SouthEast.
2370
2371              The  direction  you  choose specifies where to position the text
2372              when annotating the image. For example Center gravity forces the
2373              text  to  be  centered  within  the image. By default, the image
2374              gravity is NorthWest.  See -draw for more details about  graphic
2375              primitives.  Only the text primitive is affected by the -gravity
2376              option.
2377
2378              The -gravity option is also used in concert with  the  -geometry
2379              option  and  other  options that take <geometry> as a parameter,
2380              such as the -crop option.  See -geometry for details of how  the
2381              -gravity  option  interacts with the <x> and <y> parameters of a
2382              geometry specification.
2383
2384              When used as an option to composite, -gravity gives  the  direc‐
2385              tion that the image gravitates within the composite.
2386
2387              When  used as an option to montage, -gravity gives the direction
2388              that an image gravitates within a tile.  The default gravity  is
2389              Center for this purpose.
2390
2391       -green-primary <x>,<y>
2392              green chromaticity primary point
2393
2394       -hald-clut <clut>
2395              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
2396
2397              A  Hald  CLUT  ("Color Look-Up Table") is a special square color
2398              image which contains a look-up table for red, green,  and  blue.
2399              The size of the Hald CLUT image is determined by its order.  The
2400              width (and height) of a Hald CLUT is the cube of the order.  For
2401              example,  a Hald CLUT of order 8 is 512x512 pixels (262,144 col‐
2402              ors) and of order 16 is 4096x4096 (16,777,216 colors).   A  spe‐
2403              cial  CLUT  is the identity CLUT which which causes no change to
2404              the input image.  In order to use the Hald CLUT,  one  takes  an
2405              identity  CLUT and adjusts its colors in some way.  The modified
2406              CLUT can then be used to transform any number of  images  in  an
2407              identical way.
2408
2409              GraphicsMagick  contains  a built-in identity CLUT generator via
2410              the IDENTITY coder.  For example  reading  from  the  file  name
2411              IDENTITY:8  returns  an  identity CLUT of order 8.  Typical Hald
2412              CLUT identity images have an order of between  8  and  16.   The
2413              default  order for the IDENTITY CLUT generator is 8.  Interpola‐
2414              tion is used so it is not usually necessary for CLUT  images  to
2415              be  very  large.   The PNG file format is ideal for storing Hald
2416              CLUT images because it compresses them very well.
2417
2418       -help  print usage instructions
2419
2420       -highlight-color <color>
2421              pixel annotation color
2422
2423              Specifies the color to use when annotating difference pixels.
2424
2425       -highlight-style <style>
2426              pixel annotation style
2427
2428              Specifies the pixel difference annotation  style  used  to  draw
2429              attention  to  changed  pixels. May be one of Assign, Threshold,
2430              Tint, or XOR; where Assign replaces the pixel with the highlight
2431              color  (see -highlight-color), Threshold replaces the pixel with
2432              black or white based on the difference in intensity, Tint  alpha
2433              tints  the  pixel  with the highlight color, and XOR does an XOR
2434              between the pixel and the highlight color.
2435
2436       -iconGeometry <geometry>
2437              specify the icon geometry
2438
2439              Offsets, if present in the geometry specification,  are  handled
2440              in  the  same manner as the -geometry option, using X11 style to
2441              handle negative offsets.
2442
2443       -iconic
2444              iconic animation
2445
2446       -immutable
2447              make image immutable
2448
2449       -implode <factor>
2450              implode image pixels about the center
2451
2452       -intent <type>
2453              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
2454
2455              Use this option to affect the the color management operation  of
2456              an  image  (see -profile).  Choose from these intents: Absolute,
2457              Perceptual, Relative, Saturation.
2458
2459              The default intent is undefined.
2460
2461       -interlace <type>
2462              the type of interlacing scheme
2463
2464              Choices are: None, Line, Plane, or  Partition.  The  default  is
2465              None.
2466
2467              This  option  is  used to specify the type of interlacing scheme
2468              for raw image formats such as RGB or YUV.   None  means  do  not
2469              interlace (RGBRGBRGBRGBRGBRGB...),
2470
2471              Line             uses            scanline            interlacing
2472              (RRR...GGG...BBB...RRR...GGG...BBB...),  and  Plane  uses  plane
2473              interlacing (RRRRRR...GGGGGG...BBBBBB...).
2474
2475              Partition is like plane except the different planes are saved to
2476              individual files (e.g. image.R, image.G, and image.B).
2477
2478              Use Line to create an interlaced PNG or  GIF or progressive JPEG
2479              image.
2480
2481       -label <name>
2482              assign a label to an image
2483
2484              Use  this  option  to assign a specific label to the image, when
2485              writing to an image format that supports labels, such  as  TIFF,
2486              PNG,  MIFF,  or  PostScript. You can include the the image file‐
2487              name, type, width, height, or other image attribute by embedding
2488              special  format  character.   A label is not drawn on the image,
2489              but is embedded in the image datastream via  a  "Label"  tag  or
2490              similar  mechanism.   If you want the label to be visible on the
2491              image itself, use the -draw option.  See -comment for details.
2492
2493              For example,
2494
2495                   -label "%m:%f %wx%h"
2496
2497
2498              produces an image label of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for  an  image
2499              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2500
2501              If  the  first character of string is @, the image label is read
2502              from a file titled by the remaining characters  in  the  string.
2503              Please  note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source
2504              that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the  con‐
2505              tent  of  an  arbitrary readable file might be incorporated into
2506              the image label (a security risk).
2507
2508              If the -label option appears multiple times, only the last label
2509              is stored.
2510
2511              In  PNG images, the label is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk with
2512              the keyword "label".
2513
2514              When converting to PostScript, use  this  option  to  specify  a
2515              header  string  to print above the image. Specify the label font
2516              with -font.
2517
2518              When creating a montage, by default the label associated with an
2519              image  is  displayed with the corresponding tile in the montage.
2520              Use the +label option to suppress this behavior.
2521
2522
2523
2524       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
2525              perform local adaptive thresholding
2526
2527              Perform local adaptive thresholding using the  specified  width,
2528              height,  and  offset.   The offset is a distance in sample space
2529              from the mean, as an absolute integer ranging from 0 to the max‐
2530              imum  sample value or as a percentage.  If the percent option is
2531              supplied, then the offset is computed as  a  percentage  of  the
2532              quantum  range.   It  is strongly recommended to use the percent
2533              option so that results are not sensitive to pixel quantum depth.
2534
2535              For example,
2536
2537                   -colorspace gray -lat "10x10-5%"
2538
2539
2540              will help clarify a scanned grayscale or color document, produc‐
2541              ing a bi-level equivalent.
2542
2543       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
2544              adjust the level of image contrast
2545
2546              Give  one,  two  or  three  values delimited with commas: black-
2547              point, gamma, white-point (e.g. 10,1.0,250 or  2%,0.5,98%).  The
2548              black and white points range from 0 to MaxRGB or from 0 to 100%;
2549              if the white point is omitted it is set  to  MaxRGB-black_point.
2550              If  a  "%" sign is present anywhere in the string, the black and
2551              white points are percentages of MaxRGB.  Gamma  is  an  exponent
2552              that  ranges  from  0.1 to 10.; if it is omitted, the default of
2553              1.0 (no gamma correction) is assumed. This interface works simi‐
2554              lar  to Photoshop's "Image->Adjustments->Levels..."  "Input Lev‐
2555              els" interface.
2556
2557       -limit <type> <value>
2558              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
2559              resource limit
2560
2561              By default, resource limits are estimated based on the available
2562              resources of the system. The resource limits are  Disk,  maximum
2563              total disk space consumed; File, maximum number of file descrip‐
2564              tors allowed to be open at once; Map, maximum  total  number  of
2565              file  bytes  which  may  be memory mapped; Memory, maximum total
2566              number of bytes of heap memory used for image  storage;  Pixels,
2567              maximum  absolute  image  size (per image); Width, maximum image
2568              pixels width; Height, maximum image pixels height; and  Threads,
2569              the  maximum  number  of worker threads to use per OpenMP thread
2570              team.
2571
2572              These resource limits are used to decide if (for a given  image)
2573              the  decoded image ("pixel cache") should be stored in heap mem‐
2574              ory (RAM), in a memory-mapped disk  file,  or  in  a  disk  file
2575              accessed  via read/write I/O.  The number of total pixels in one
2576              image, and/or the width/height, may also be limited in order  to
2577              force  the  reading, or creation of images larger than the limit
2578              (in pixels) to intentionally fail. The disk limit establishes an
2579              overall  limit since using the disk is the means of last resort.
2580              When the disk limit has been reached,  no  more  images  may  be
2581              read.
2582
2583              The  value  argument is an absolute value, but may have standard
2584              binary suffix characters applied ('K', 'M', 'G', 'T', 'P',  'E')
2585              to apply a scaling to the value (based on a multiplier of 1024).
2586              Any additional characters are ignored. For example, '-limit Pix‐
2587              els  10MP'  limits  the  maximum image size to 10 megapixels and
2588              '-limit memory 32MB -limit map 64MB' limits  memory  and  memory
2589              mapped files to 32 megabytes and 64 megabytes respectively.
2590
2591              Resource limits may also be set using environment variables. The
2592              environment  variables  MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK,   MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES,
2593              MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP, MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY, MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS, MAG‐
2594              ICK_LIMIT_WIDTH, MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT,and OMP_NUM_THREADS may  be
2595              used to set the limits for disk space, open files, memory mapped
2596              size, heap memory, per-image pixels, image width, image  height,
2597              and threads respectively.
2598
2599              Use the option -list resource list the current limits.
2600
2601       -linewidth
2602              the line width for subsequent draw operations
2603
2604       -list <type>
2605              the type of list
2606
2607              Choices  are:  Color, Delegate, Format, Magic, Module, Resource,
2608              or Type. The Module option is only available  if  GraphicsMagick
2609              was built to support loadable modules.
2610
2611              This  option lists information about the GraphicsMagick configu‐
2612              ration.
2613
2614       -log <string>
2615              Specify format for debug log
2616
2617              This option specifies the format for the log  printed  when  the
2618              -debug option is active.
2619
2620              You  can  display  the following components by embedding special
2621              format characters:
2622
2623                   %d   domain
2624                   %e   event
2625                   %f   function
2626                   %l   line
2627                   %m   module
2628                   %p   process ID
2629                   %r   real CPU time
2630                   %t   wall clock time
2631                   %u   user CPU time
2632                   %%   percent sign
2633                   \n   newline
2634                   \r   carriage return
2635
2636
2637              For example:
2638
2639                  gm convert -debug coders -log "%u %m:%l %e" in.gif out.png
2640
2641
2642              The default behavior is to print all of the components.
2643
2644       -loop <iterations>
2645              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
2646
2647              A value other than zero forces the animation to repeat itself up
2648              to iterations times.
2649
2650       -magnify
2651              magnify the image
2652
2653              The image size is doubled using linear interpolation.
2654
2655       -magnify <factor>
2656              magnify the image
2657
2658              The displayed image is magnified by factor.
2659
2660       -map <filename>
2661              choose a particular set of colors from this image
2662
2663              [convert or mogrify]
2664
2665              By  default,  color  reduction  chooses an optimal set of colors
2666              that best represent the original image. Alternatively,  you  can
2667              choose  a  particular set of colors from an image file with this
2668              option.
2669
2670              Use +map to reduce all images in the image sequence that follows
2671              to  a  single  optimal set of colors that best represent all the
2672              images.  The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance
2673              of  any  option.   If  the  +map option appears after all of the
2674              input images, all images are mapped.
2675
2676       -map <type>
2677              display image using this type.
2678
2679              [animate or display]
2680
2681              Choose from these Standard Colormap types:
2682
2683                   best
2684                   default
2685                   gray
2686                   red
2687                   green
2688                   blue
2689
2690
2691              The X server must support the Standard Colormap you choose, oth‐
2692              erwise  an  error  occurs.  Use  list  as  the  type and display
2693              searches the list of colormap types in top-to-bottom order until
2694              one is located. See xstdcmap(1) for one way of creating Standard
2695              Colormaps.
2696
2697       -mask <filename>
2698              Specify a clipping mask
2699
2700              The image read from the file is used as  a  clipping  mask.   It
2701              must have the same dimensions as the image being masked.
2702
2703              If  the  mask  image contains an opacity channel, the opacity of
2704              each pixel is used to define the mask.  Otherwise, the intensity
2705              (gray level) of each pixel is used.  Unmasked (black) pixels are
2706              modified while masked pixels  (not  black)  are  protected  from
2707              alteration.
2708
2709              Use +mask to remove the clipping mask.
2710
2711              It  is not necessary to use -clip to activate the mask; -clip is
2712              implied by -mask.
2713
2714       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
2715
2716              If the image does not have a matte  channel,  create  an  opaque
2717              one.
2718
2719              Use  +matte  to  ignore the matte channel and to avoid writing a
2720              matte channel in the output file.
2721
2722       -mattecolor <color>
2723              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
2724
2725              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
2726              -fill option.
2727
2728       -maximum-error <limit>
2729              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
2730
2731              Specifies the maximum amount of total image error (based on com‐
2732              parison using a specified metric) before an error  ("image  dif‐
2733              ference  exceeds limit") is reported.  The error is reported via
2734              a non-zero command execution return status.
2735
2736       -median <radius>
2737              apply a median filter to the image
2738
2739       -metric <metric>
2740              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
2741
2742       -minify <factor>
2743              minify the image
2744
2745              The image size is halved using linear interpolation.
2746
2747       -mode <value>
2748              mode of operation
2749
2750              The available montage modes are frame to place the images  in  a
2751              rectangular  grid  while  adding  a  decorative frame with drop‐
2752              shadow, unframe to place undecorated  images  in  a  rectangular
2753              grid,  and concatenate to pack the images closely together with‐
2754              out any well-defined grid or decoration.
2755
2756       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
2757              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
2758
2759              Specify the percent change in brightness, color saturation,  and
2760              hue  separated  by  commas. Default argument values are 100 per‐
2761              cent, resulting in no change. For example, to increase the color
2762              brightness  by  20% and decrease the color saturation by 10% and
2763              leave the hue unchanged, use: -modulate 120,90.
2764
2765              Hue is the percentage of  absolute  rotation  from  the  current
2766              position. For example 50 results in a counter-clockwise rotation
2767              of 90 degrees,  150  results  in  a  clockwise  rotation  of  90
2768              degrees,  with  0  and  200  both resulting in a rotation of 180
2769              degrees.
2770
2771       -monitor
2772              show progress indication
2773
2774              A simple command-line progress indication  is  shown  while  the
2775              command  is  running. The process indication shows the operation
2776              currently being performed and the  percent  completed.  Commands
2777              using  X11 may replace the command line progress indication with
2778              a graphical one once an image has been displayed.
2779
2780       -monochrome
2781              transform the image to black and white
2782
2783       -morph <frames>
2784              morphs an image sequence
2785
2786              Both the image pixels and size are linearly interpolated to give
2787              the appearance of a meta-morphosis from one image to the next.
2788
2789              The  sequence  of  images is terminated by the appearance of any
2790              option.  If the -morph option appears after  all  of  the  input
2791              images, all images are morphed.
2792
2793       -mosaic
2794              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
2795
2796              The  -mosaic  option provides a flexible way to composite one or
2797              more images onto a solid-color canvas image. It works similar to
2798              -flatten  except  that a base canvas image is automatically cre‐
2799              ated with a suitable size given the image size, page dimensions,
2800              and  page  offsets of images to be composited.  The color of the
2801              base canvas image may be set via the  -background  option.   The
2802              default  canvas  color  is 'white', but 'black' or 'transparent'
2803              may be more suitable  depending  on  the  composition  algorithm
2804              requested.
2805
2806              The -compose option may be used to specify the composition algo‐
2807              rithm to use when compositing the subsequent image on  the  base
2808              canvas.
2809
2810              The  -page option can be used to establish the dimensions of the
2811              mosaic and to position the subsequent image within  the  mosaic.
2812              If  the  -page  argument does not specify width and height, then
2813              the canvas dimensions are evaluated based on the image sizes and
2814              offsets.
2815
2816              The  sequence  of  images is terminated by the appearance of any
2817              option.  If the -mosaic option appears after all  of  the  input
2818              images, all images are included in the mosaic.
2819
2820              The  following is an example of composing an image based on red,
2821              green, and blue layers extracted from a sequence of  images  and
2822              pasted on the canvas image at specified offsets:
2823
2824                  gm convert -background black \
2825                            -compose CopyRed   -page +0-100 red.png \
2826                            -compose CopyGreen -page +0+40  green.png \
2827                            -compose CopyBlue  -page +0+180 blue.png \
2828                            -mosaic output.png
2829
2830
2831       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
2832              Simulate motion blur
2833
2834              Simulate  motion  blur  by  convolving the image with a Gaussian
2835              operator of the given radius and standard deviation (sigma). For
2836              reasonable  results,  radius  should  be  larger  than sigma. If
2837              radius is zero, then a suitable radius is automatically selected
2838              based on sigma. The angle specifies the angle that the object is
2839              coming from (side which is blurred).
2840
2841       -name  name an image
2842
2843       -negate
2844              replace every pixel with its complementary color
2845
2846              The red, green, and blue intensities of an  image  are  negated.
2847              White  becomes  black, yellow becomes blue, etc.  Use +negate to
2848              only negate the grayscale pixels of the image.
2849
2850       -noise <radius|type>
2851              add or reduce noise in an image
2852
2853              The principal function of noise peak elimination  filter  is  to
2854              smooth  the objects within an image without losing edge informa‐
2855              tion and without creating undesired structures. The central idea
2856              of the algorithm is to replace a pixel with its next neighbor in
2857              value within a pixel window, if this pixel has been found to  be
2858              noise.  A pixel is defined as noise if and only if this pixel is
2859              a maximum or minimum within the pixel window.
2860
2861              Use radius to specify the width of the neighborhood.
2862
2863              Use +noise followed by a noise type to add noise  to  an  image.
2864              The noise added modulates the existing image pixels. Choose from
2865              these noise types:
2866
2867                   Uniform
2868                   Gaussian
2869                   Multiplicative
2870                   Impulse
2871                   Laplacian
2872                   Poisson
2873                   Random (uniform distribution)
2874
2875
2876       -noop  NOOP (no option)
2877
2878              The -noop option can be used to terminate a group of images  and
2879              reset  all options to their default values, when no other option
2880              is desired.
2881
2882       -normalize
2883              transform image to span the full range of color values
2884
2885              This is a contrast enhancement technique based on the image his‐
2886              togram.
2887
2888              When  computing  the  contrast enhancement values, the histogram
2889              edges are truncated so that the majority of the image pixels are
2890              considered in the constrast enhancement, and outliers (e.g. ran‐
2891              dom noise or minute details) are ignored.  The default  is  that
2892              0.1  percent of the histogram entries are ignored.  The percent‐
2893              age of the histogram to ignore may be  specified  by  using  the
2894              -set  option  with  the histogram-threshold parameter similar to
2895              -set histogram-threshold 0.01 to specify 0.01  percent.   Use  0
2896              percent  to  use  the entire histogram, with possibly diminished
2897              contrast enhancement.
2898
2899       -opaque <color>
2900              change this color to the pen color within the image
2901
2902              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
2903              -fill  option.   The color is replaced if it is identical to the
2904              target color, or close enough to the target color in a 3D  space
2905              as defined by the Euclidean distance specified by -fuzz.
2906
2907              See -fill and -fuzz for more details.
2908
2909       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
2910              apply  a  mathematical,  bitwise,  or value operator to an image
2911              channel
2912
2913              Apply a low-level mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to  a
2914              selected  image  channel or all image channels. Operations which
2915              result in negative results are reset  to  zero,  and  operations
2916              which overflow the available range are reset to the maximum pos‐
2917              sible value.
2918
2919              Select a channel from: Red, Green, Blue, Opacity,  Matte,  Cyan,
2920              Magenta,  Yellow,  Black,  All,  or  Gray. All only modifies the
2921              color channels and does not modify the Opacity  channel.  Except
2922              for  the threshold operators, All operates on each channel inde‐
2923              pendently so that operations are on a per-channel basis.
2924
2925              Gray treats the color channels as a grayscale intensity and per‐
2926              forms  the requested operation on the equivalent pixel intensity
2927              so the result is a gray image.  Select  an  operator  from  Add,
2928              And,  Assign,  Depth,  Divide,  Gamma, Negate, LShift, Log, Max,
2929              Min, Multiply, Or, Pow RShift, Subtract,  Threshold,  Threshold-
2930              White, Threshold-White-Negate, Threshold-Black, Threshold-Black-
2931              Negate,  Xor,  Noise-Gaussian,  Noise-Impulse,  Noise-Laplacian,
2932              Noise-Multiplicative,  Noise-Poisson,  Noise-Random,  and Noise-
2933              Uniform.
2934
2935              Rvalue may be any floating  point  or  integer  value.  Normally
2936              rvalue  will be in the range of 0 to MaxRGB, where MaxRGB is the
2937              largest quantum value  supported  by  the  GraphicsMagick  build
2938              (255,  65535,  or  4294967295) but values outside this range are
2939              useful for some arithmetic operations.  Arguments to logical  or
2940              bit-wise  operations  are  rounded  to a positive integral value
2941              prior to use. If a percent (%) symbol is appended to  the  argu‐
2942              ment, then the argument has a range of 0 to 100 percent.
2943
2944              The following is a description of the operators:
2945
2946
2947               Add
2948
2949                    Result is rvalue added to channel value.
2950
2951               And
2952
2953                    Result is the logical AND of rvalue with channel value.
2954
2955               Assign
2956
2957                    Result is rvalue.
2958
2959               Depth
2960
2961                    Result  is  channel  value  adjusted  so  that  it  may be
2962                    (approximately) stored in the  specified  number  of  bits
2963                    without additional loss.
2964
2965               Divide
2966
2967                    Result is channel value divided by rvalue.
2968
2969               Gamma
2970
2971                    Result is channel value gamma adjusted by rvalue.
2972
2973               LShift
2974
2975                    Result  is  channel  value  bitwise left shifted by rvalue
2976                    bits.
2977
2978               Log
2979
2980                    Result is computed as log(value*rvalue+1)/log(rvalue+1).
2981
2982               Max
2983
2984                    Result is assigned to rvalue if  rvalue  is  greater  than
2985                    value.
2986
2987               Min
2988
2989                    Result is assigned to rvalue if rvalue is less than value.
2990
2991               Multiply
2992
2993                    Result is channel value multiplied by rvalue.
2994
2995               Negate
2996
2997                    Result is inverse of channel value (like a film negative).
2998                    An rvalue must be supplied  but  is  currently  not  used.
2999                    Inverting the image twice results in the original image.
3000
3001               Or
3002
3003                    Result is the logical OR of rvalue with channel value.
3004
3005               Pow
3006
3007                    Result  is computed as pow(value,rvalue). Similar to Gamma
3008                    except that rvalue is not inverted.
3009
3010               RShift
3011
3012                    Result is channel value bitwise right  shifted  by  rvalue
3013                    bits.
3014
3015               Subtract
3016
3017                    Result is channel value minus rvalue.
3018
3019               Threshold
3020
3021                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3022                    rvalue, or minimum (black) if it is less than or equal  to
3023                    rvalue.  If  all channels are specified, then thresholding
3024                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3025
3026               Threshold-white
3027
3028                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3029                    rvalue  and  is  unchanged  if it is less than or equal to
3030                    rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise from the
3031                    bright  parts  of an image. If all channels are specified,
3032                    then thresholding is done based on computed  pixel  inten‐
3033                    sity.
3034
3035               Threshold-White-Negate
3036
3037                    Result  is  set  to black if channel value is greater than
3038                    rvalue and is unchanged if it is less  than  or  equal  to
3039                    rvalue.  If  all channels are specified, then thresholding
3040                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3041
3042               Threshold-black
3043
3044                    Result is minimum (black) if channel value  is  less  than
3045                    than  rvalue  and  is  unchanged  if it is greater than or
3046                    equal to rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise
3047                    from the dark parts of an image. If all channels are spec‐
3048                    ified, then thresholding is done based on  computed  pixel
3049                    intensity.
3050
3051               Threshold-Black-Negate
3052
3053                    Result  is set to white if channel value is less than than
3054                    rvalue and is unchanged if it is greater than or equal  to
3055                    rvalue.  If  all channels are specified, then thresholding
3056                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3057
3058               Xor
3059
3060                    Result is the logical XOR of rvalue with channel value. An
3061                    interesting  property  of  XOR is that performing the same
3062                    operation twice results in the original value.
3063
3064               Noise-Gaussian
3065
3066                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  gauss‐
3067                    ian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3068
3069               Noise-Impulse
3070
3071                    Result is the current channel value modulated with impulse
3072                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3073
3074               Noise-Laplacian
3075
3076                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  lapla‐
3077                    cian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3078
3079               Noise-Multiplicative
3080
3081                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with multi‐
3082                    plicative gaussian noise according to the intensity speci‐
3083                    fied by rvalue.
3084
3085               Noise-Poisson
3086
3087                    Result is the current channel value modulated with poisson
3088                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3089
3090               Noise-Random
3091
3092                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  random
3093                    (uniform  distribution)  noise  according to the intensity
3094                    specified  by  rvalue.   The   initial   noise   intensity
3095                    (rvalue=1.0) is the range of one pixel quantum span.
3096
3097               Noise-Uniform
3098
3099                    Result  is  the  channel  value with uniform noise applied
3100                    according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3101
3102
3103
3104
3105               As an example, the Assign operator assigns a fixed value  to  a
3106               channel.  For example, this command sets the red channel to the
3107               mid-range value:
3108
3109                   gm convert in.bmp -operator red assign "50%" out.bmp
3110
3111
3112               The following applies 50% thresholding to the image and returns
3113               a gray image:
3114
3115                   gm convert in.bmp -operator gray threshold "50%" out.bmp
3116
3117
3118       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
3119              ordered dither the image
3120
3121              The  channel  or  channels specified in the channeltype argument
3122              are reduced to binary,  using  an  ordered  dither  method.  The
3123              choices  for  channeltype  are All, Intensity, Red, Green, Blue,
3124              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3125
3126              When channeltype is "All", the color samples are dithered into a
3127              gray level and then that gray level is stored in the three color
3128              channels.  Separately, the opacity channel is  dithered  into  a
3129              bilevel opacity value which is stored in the opacity channel.
3130
3131              When  channeltype  is  "Intensity",  only  the color samples are
3132              dithered. When channeltype is "opacity"  or  "matte",  only  the
3133              opacity  channel is dithered. When a color channel is specified,
3134              only that channel is dithered.
3135
3136              The choices for N are 2 through 7. The image is divided into NxN
3137              pixel  tiles.   In  each  tile, some or all pixels are turned to
3138              white depending on their intensity.  For each N, (N**2)+1 levels
3139              of gray can be represented.  For N == 2, 3, or 4, the pixels are
3140              turned to white in an order  that  maximizes  dispersion  (i.e.,
3141              reduces  granularity),  while  for  N  ==  5, 6, and 7, they are
3142              turned to white in an order  that  creates  a  roughly  circular
3143              black  blob  in  the  middle of each tile.  An attractive "half-
3144              tone" looking image can be obtained by first rotating the  image
3145              45  degrees,  performing  a  5x5  ordered-dither operation, then
3146              rotating it back to the original orientation and cropping to the
3147              original  image  dimensions.   If  the  original image is gamma-
3148              encoded, it is adviseable to  convert  it  to  linear  intensity
3149              first, e.g., with the "-gamma 0.45455" option.
3150
3151       -output-directory <directory>
3152              output files to directory
3153
3154              Use  -output-directory  to  specify  a  directory under which to
3155              write the output files. Normally mogrify  overwrites  the  input
3156              files, but with this option the output files may be written to a
3157              different directory tree so that the input files are  preserved.
3158              The algorithm used preserves all of the input path specification
3159              in the  output  path  so  that  the  user-specified  input  path
3160              (including  any  sub-directory  part)  is appended to the output
3161              path. If the input file lacks  an  extension,  then  a  suitable
3162              extension  is  automatically added to the output file.  The user
3163              is responsible for creating the output directory specified as an
3164              argument,  but  subdirectories  will be created as needed if the
3165              -create-directories option is supplied.  This option may be used
3166              to  apply  transformations on files from one directory and write
3167              the transformed files to a different directory.  In  conjunction
3168              with  -create-directories,  this  option  is designed to support
3169              transforming whole directory trees of files  provided  that  the
3170              relative  path of the input file is included as part the list of
3171              filenames.
3172
3173       -orient <orientation>
3174              Set the image orientation attribute
3175
3176              Sets the image orientation  attribute.   The  image  orientation
3177              attribute  is  compatible with the TIFF orientation tag (and the
3178              EXIF orientation tag).  Accepted values are undefined,  TopLeft,
3179              TopRight,  BottomRight, BottomLeft, LeftTop, RightTop, RightBot‐
3180              tom, LeftBottom, and hyphenated versions thereof (e.g. left-bot‐
3181              tom).   Please note that GraphicsMagick does not include an EXIF
3182              editor so if an EXIF profile is written to the output image, the
3183              value in the EXIF profile might not match the image.  It is pos‐
3184              sible for an image file to indicate its orientation  in  several
3185              different ways simultaneously.
3186
3187       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
3188              size and location of an image canvas
3189
3190              Use this option to specify the dimensions of the PostScript page
3191              in dots per inch or a TEXT page in pixels.  The  choices  for  a
3192              PostScript page are:
3193
3194                   11x17         792  1224
3195                   Ledger       1224   792
3196                   Legal         612  1008
3197                   Letter        612   792
3198                   LetterSmall   612   792
3199                   ArchE        2592  3456
3200                   ArchD        1728  2592
3201                   ArchC        1296  1728
3202                   ArchB         864  1296
3203                   ArchA         648   864
3204                   A0           2380  3368
3205                   A1           1684  2380
3206                   A2           1190  1684
3207                   A3            842  1190
3208                   A4            595   842
3209                   A4Small       595   842
3210                   A5            421   595
3211                   A6            297   421
3212                   A7            210   297
3213                   A8            148   210
3214                   A9            105   148
3215                   A10            74   105
3216                   B0           2836  4008
3217                   B1           2004  2836
3218                   B2           1418  2004
3219                   B3           1002  1418
3220                   B4            709  1002
3221                   B5            501   709
3222                   C0           2600  3677
3223                   C1           1837  2600
3224                   C2           1298  1837
3225                   C3            918  1298
3226                   C4            649   918
3227                   C5            459   649
3228                   C6            323   459
3229                   Flsa          612   936
3230                   Flse          612   936
3231                   HalfLetter    396   612
3232
3233
3234              For convenience you can specify the page size by media (e.g. A4,
3235              Ledger, etc.). Otherwise,  -page  behaves  much  like  -geometry
3236              (e.g.  -page letter+43+43>).
3237
3238              This  option  is  also used to place subimages when writing to a
3239              multi-image format that supports offsets, such as GIF89 and MNG.
3240              When used for this purpose the offsets are always  measured from
3241              the top left corner of the canvas and are not  affected  by  the
3242              -gravity   option.    To  position  a  GIF  or  MNG  image,  use
3243              -page{+-}<x>{+-}<y> (e.g. -page +100+200).  When  writing  to  a
3244              MNG  file,  a -page option appearing ahead of the first image in
3245              the sequence with nonzero width and height defines the width and
3246              height  values  that  are written in the MHDR chunk.  Otherwise,
3247              the MNG width and height are computed from the bounding box that
3248              contains all images in the sequence.  When writing a GIF89 file,
3249              only the bounding box method is used  to  determine  its  dimen‐
3250              sions.
3251
3252              For  a  PostScript  page, the image is sized as in -geometry and
3253              positioned relative to the lower left hand corner of the page by
3254              {+-}<xoffset>{+-}<y offset>. Use -page 612x792>, for example, to
3255              center the image within the page. If the image size exceeds  the
3256              PostScript  page,  it  is  reduced to fit the page.  The default
3257              gravity for the -page option is NorthWest, i.e., positive x  and
3258              y  offset  are measured rightward and downward from the top left
3259              corner of the page, unless the -gravity option is present with a
3260              value other than NorthWest.
3261
3262              The default page dimensions for a TEXT image is 612x792.
3263
3264              This option is used in concert with -density.
3265
3266              Use +page to remove the page settings for an image.
3267
3268       -paint <radius>
3269              simulate an oil painting
3270
3271              Each  pixel is replaced by the most frequent color in a circular
3272              neighborhood whose width is specified with radius.
3273
3274       -pause <seconds>
3275              pause between animation loops [animate]
3276
3277              Pause for the specified number of seconds before  repeating  the
3278              animation.
3279
3280       -pause <seconds>
3281              pause between snapshots [import]
3282
3283              Pause for the specified number of seconds before taking the next
3284              snapshot.
3285
3286       -pen <color>
3287              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
3288
3289       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
3290
3291              Use this option to disable reading  the  image  pixels  so  that
3292              image  characteristics  such  as  the  image  dimensions  may be
3293              obtained very quickly. For identify, use +ping to force  reading
3294              the  image pixels so that the pixel read rate may be included in
3295              the displayed information.
3296
3297       -pointsize <value>
3298              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
3299
3300       -preview <type>
3301              image preview type
3302
3303              Use this option to affect the  preview  operation  of  an  image
3304              (e.g.    convert  file.png  -preview  Gamma  Preview:gamma.png).
3305              Choose from these previews:
3306
3307                   Rotate
3308                   Shear
3309                   Roll
3310                   Hue
3311                   Saturation
3312                   Brightness
3313                   Gamma
3314                   Spiff
3315                   Dull
3316                   Grayscale
3317                   Quantize
3318                   Despeckle
3319                   ReduceNoise
3320                   AddNoise
3321                   Sharpen
3322                   Blur
3323                   Threshold
3324                   EdgeDetect
3325                   Spread
3326                   Shade
3327                   Raise
3328                   Segment
3329                   Solarize
3330                   Swirl
3331                   Implode
3332                   Wave
3333                   OilPaint
3334                   CharcoalDrawing
3335                   JPEG
3336
3337
3338              The default preview is JPEG.
3339
3340       -process <command>
3341              process a sequence of images using a process module
3342
3343              The command argument has the form module=arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN
3344              where  module  is  the  name of the module to invoke (e.g. "ana‐
3345              lyze") and arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN are an  arbitrary  number  of
3346              arguments to pass to the process module.  The sequence of images
3347              is terminated by the appearance of any option.
3348
3349              If the -process option appears after all of  the  input  images,
3350              all images are processed.
3351
3352       -profile <filename>
3353              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
3354
3355              -profile  filename  adds  an  ICM  (ICC  color management), IPTC
3356              (newswire information), or a generic (including Exif) profile to
3357              the image
3358
3359              Use  +profile  icm,  +profile  iptc, or +profile profile_name to
3360              remove the respective profile.  Multiple profiles may be listed,
3361              separated  by  commas.  Profiles may be excluded from subsequent
3362              listed matches by  preceding  their  name  with  an  exclamation
3363              point.   For  example,  +profile  '!icm,*'  strips  all profiles
3364              except for the ICM profile.  Use identify -verbose to  find  out
3365              what profiles are in the image file.  Use +profile "*" to remove
3366              all profiles.  Writing the image to a format that does not  sup‐
3367              port  profiles  will  of  course  also  cause all profiles to be
3368              removed.  The JPEG and PNG formats will store any profiles  that
3369              have been read and not removed.  In JPEG they are stored in APP1
3370              markers, and in PNG they are stored as hex-coded binary in  com‐
3371              pressed zTXt chunks, except for the iCC chunk which is stored in
3372              the iCCP chunk.
3373
3374              To extract a profile, the -profile option is not used.  Instead,
3375              simply  write  the  file  to an image format such as APP1, 8BIM,
3376              ICM, or IPTC.
3377
3378              For example, to extract the Exif data (which is stored  in  JPEG
3379              files in the APP1 profile), use
3380
3381
3382                  gm convert cockatoo.jpg exifdata.app1
3383
3384              Note  that GraphicsMagick does not attempt to update any profile
3385              to reflect changes made to the image, e.g., rotation  from  por‐
3386              trait  to landscape orientation, so it is possible that the pre‐
3387              served profile may contain invalid data.
3388
3389       -preserve-timestamp
3390              preserve the original timestamps of the file
3391
3392              Use this option to preserve the original modification and access
3393              timestamps of the file, even if it has been modified.
3394
3395       +progress
3396              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
3397
3398              By  default,  when an image is displayed, a progress monitor bar
3399              is shown in the top left corner of  an  existing  image  display
3400              window,  and  the  current  cursor is replaced with an hourglass
3401              cursor. Use +progress to disable the progress monitor  and  busy
3402              cursor during display operations.  While the progress monitor is
3403              disabled for all operations, the busy  cursor  continues  to  be
3404              enabled  for  non-display  operations  such as image processing.
3405              This option is useful for non-interactive display operations, or
3406              when a "clean" look is desired.
3407
3408       -quality <value>
3409              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
3410               For the JPEG and MPEG image formats, quality is 0 (lowest image
3411              quality and highest compression) to 100 (best quality but  least
3412              effective  compression).  The  default  quality  is 75.  Use the
3413              -sampling-factor option to specify the factors for chroma  down‐
3414              sampling.   To  use  the same quality value as that found by the
3415              JPEG decoder, use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3416
3417              For the MIFF image format, and the TIFF format while  using  ZIP
3418              compression,  quality/10 is the zlib compression level, which is
3419              0 (worst but fastest compression) to 9 (best  but  slowest).  It
3420              has  no effect on the image appearance, since the compression is
3421              always lossless.
3422
3423              For the JPEG-2000 image format, quality is mapped using  a  non-
3424              linear  equation to the compression ratio required by the Jasper
3425              library. This non-linear equation is intended to loosely approx‐
3426              imate  the  quality  provided by the JPEG v1 format. The default
3427              quality value 75 results in a request for 16:1 compression.  The
3428              quality  value  100  results in a request for non-lossy compres‐
3429              sion.
3430
3431              For the MNG and PNG image formats, the quality  value  sets  the
3432              zlib compression level (quality / 10) and filter-type (quality %
3433              10). Compression levels range from 0  (fastest  compression)  to
3434              100  (best  but  slowest). For compression level 0, the Huffman-
3435              only strategy is used, which is fastest but not necessarily  the
3436              worst compression.
3437
3438              If  filter-type  is 4 or less, the specified filter-type is used
3439              for all scanlines:
3440
3441                   0: none
3442                   1: sub
3443                   2: up
3444                   3: average
3445                   4: Paeth
3446
3447
3448              If filter-type is 5, adaptive filtering is used when quality  is
3449              greater  than 50 and the image does not have a color map, other‐
3450              wise no filtering is used.
3451
3452              If filter-type is 6,  adaptive  filtering  with  minimum-sum-of-
3453              absolute-values is used.
3454
3455              Only  if  the output is MNG, if filter-type is 7, the LOCO color
3456              transformation and adaptive filtering with  minimum-sum-of-abso‐
3457              lute-values are used.
3458
3459              The  default  is quality is 75, which means nearly the best com‐
3460              pression with adaptive filtering.  The quality  setting  has  no
3461              effect  on  the appearance of PNG and MNG images, since the com‐
3462              pression is always lossless.
3463
3464              For further information, see the PNG specification.
3465
3466              When writing a JNG image with transparency, two  quality  values
3467              are  required,  one for the main image and one for the grayscale
3468              image that conveys the opacity channel.  These are written as  a
3469              single  integer  equal to the main image quality plus 1000 times
3470              the opacity quality.  For example, if you want to use quality 75
3471              for  the main image and quality 90 to compress the opacity data,
3472              use -quality 90075.
3473
3474              For the PNM family of formats (PNM,  PGM,  and  PPM)  specify  a
3475              quality  factor  of zero in order to obtain the ASCII variant of
3476              the format. Note that -compress none used to be used to  trigger
3477              ASCII  output  but  provided  the  opposite  result  of what was
3478              expected as compared with other formats.
3479
3480              For the TIFF format, the JPEG, WebP, Zip, and  Zstd  compression
3481              algorithms  are  influenced by the quality value.  JPEG and WebP
3482              provide lossy compression so higher quality  produces  a  larger
3483              file  with less degradation.  The Zip and Zstd compression algo‐
3484              rithms (and WebP in lossless mode) are lossless  and  for  these
3485              algorithms  a higher ´quality' means to work harder to produce a
3486              smaller file, but with no difference in image quality.
3487
3488       -raise <width>x<height>
3489              lighten or darken image edges
3490
3491              This will create a 3-D effect. See -geometry for details details
3492              about the geometry specification. Offsets are not used.
3493
3494              Use -raise to create a raised effect, otherwise use +raise.
3495
3496       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
3497              random threshold the image
3498
3499              The  channel or channels specified in the <channeltype> argument
3500              are reduced to binary, using  an  random-threshold  method.  The
3501              choices  for  channeltype  are All, Intensity, Red, Green, Blue,
3502              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3503
3504              When channeltype is "All", the  color  samples  are  thresholded
3505              into a graylevel and then that gray level is stored in the three
3506              color channels. Separately, the opacity channel  is  thresholded
3507              into  a  bilevel  opacity  value  which is stored in the opacity
3508              channel. For each pixel, a new random number is used  to  estab‐
3509              lish  the  threshold to be used. The threshold never exceeds the
3510              specified maximum (HIGH) and is never less  than  the  specified
3511              minimum (LOW).
3512
3513              When  channeltype  is  "intensity",  only  the color samples are
3514              thresholded. When channeltype is "opacity" or "matte", only  the
3515              opacity  channel  is  thresholded. The other named channels only
3516              threshold the associated channel.
3517
3518       -recolor <matrix>
3519              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
3520
3521              A user supplied color translation matrix (expressed  as  a  text
3522              string)  is  used to translate/blend the image channels based on
3523              weightings in a supplied matrix which may be of order  3  (color
3524              channels  only),  4  (color  channels plus opacity), or 5 (color
3525              channels plus opacity and offset).  Values in the columns of the
3526              matrix  (red, green, blue, opacity) are used as multipliers with
3527              the existing channel values and added together according to  the
3528              rows of the matrix.  Matrix values are floating point and may be
3529              negative.  The offset column (column 5) is purely  additive  and
3530              is  scaled  such  that 0.0 to 1.0 represents the maximum quantum
3531              range (but values are not limited to this range). The  math  for
3532              the  color  translation  matrix is similar to that used by Adobe
3533              Flash except that the offset is scaled to 1.0 (divide Flash off‐
3534              set  by 255 for use with GraphicsMagick) so that the results are
3535              independent of quantum depth.
3536
3537              An identity matrix exists for each matrix order which results in
3538              no  change to the image.  The translation matrix should be based
3539              on an alteration of the identity matrix.
3540
3541              Identity matrix of order 3
3542
3543                1 0 0
3544                0 1 0
3545                0 0 1
3546
3547
3548              which may be formatted into a convenient matrix argument similar
3549              to (comma is treated as white space):
3550
3551                -recolor "1 0 0, 0 1 0, 0 0 1"
3552
3553
3554              Identity matrix of order 4
3555
3556                1 0 0 0
3557                0 1 0 0
3558                0 0 1 0
3559                0 0 0 1
3560
3561
3562              Identity  matrix  of order 5.  The last row is required to exist
3563              for the purpose of parsing, but is otherwise not used.
3564
3565                1 0 0 0 0
3566                0 1 0 0 0
3567                0 0 1 0 0
3568                0 0 0 1 0
3569                0 0 0 0 1
3570
3571
3572              As an example, an image wrongly in BGR channel order may be con‐
3573              verted to RGB using this matrix (blue->red, red->blue):
3574
3575                0 0 1
3576                0 1 0
3577                1 0 0
3578
3579
3580              and  an  RGB  image using standard Rec.709 primaries may be con‐
3581              verted to grayscale using this matrix of standard weighting fac‐
3582              tors:
3583
3584                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3585                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3586                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3587
3588
3589              and  contrast may be reduced by scaling down by 80% and adding a
3590              10% offset:
3591
3592                0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1
3593                0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.1
3594                0.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.1
3595                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.1
3596                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
3597
3598
3599       -red-primary <x>,<y>
3600              red chromaticity primary point
3601
3602       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3603              apply options to a portion of the image
3604
3605              The x and y offsets are treated in the same manner as in -crop.
3606
3607       -remote
3608              perform a X11 remote operation
3609
3610              The -remote command sends a command to a  "gm  display"  or  "gm
3611              animate"  which  is already running. The only command recognized
3612              at this time is the name of an image file to load. This capabil‐
3613              ity is very useful to load new images without needing to restart
3614              GraphicsMagick (e.g. for a slide-show or to  use  GraphicsMagick
3615              as  the  display  engine  for  a  different  GUI).  Also see the
3616              +progress option for a way to disable progress indication for  a
3617              clean look while loading new images.
3618
3619       -render
3620              render vector operations
3621
3622              Use  +render  to  turn  off rendering vector operations. This is
3623              useful when saving the result to vector formats such as  MVG  or
3624              SVG.
3625
3626       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
3627              Adjust image page offsets
3628
3629              Adjust  the  current  image  page canvas and position based on a
3630              relative page specification.  This option may be used to  change
3631              the  location of a subframe (e.g. part of an animation) prior to
3632              composition.   If  the  geometry   specification   is   absolute
3633              (includes  a  '!'),  then  the offset adjustment is absolute and
3634              there is no adjustment to page width and height,  otherwise  the
3635              page width and height values are also adjusted based on the cur‐
3636              rent image dimensions.  Use +repage to set the image  page  off‐
3637              sets to default.
3638
3639       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
3640              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
3641
3642              Resize  the  image so that its rendered size remains the same as
3643              the original at the specified target resolution. Either the cur‐
3644              rent  image  resolution  units or the previously set with -units
3645              are used to interpret the argument. For example, if  a  300  DPI
3646              image  renders at 3 inches by 2 inches on a 300 DPI device, when
3647              the image has been resampled to 72 DPI,  it  will  render  at  3
3648              inches  by  2 inches on a 72 DPI device.  Note that only a small
3649              number of image formats (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and TIFF)  are  capable
3650              of  storing  the image resolution. For formats which do not sup‐
3651              port an image resolution, the original resolution of  the  image
3652              must  be  specified  via  -density  on the command line prior to
3653              specifying the resample resolution.
3654
3655              Note that Photoshop stores and obtains image resolution  from  a
3656              proprietary  embedded  profile.  If  this  profile exists in the
3657              image, then Photoshop will continue to treat the image using its
3658              former  resolution,  ignoring  the image resolution specified in
3659              the standard file header.
3660
3661              Some image formats (e.g. PNG) require use of metric  or  english
3662              units  so even if the original image used a particular unit sys‐
3663              tem, if it is saved to a different format prior  to  resampling,
3664              then it may be necessary to specify the desired resolution units
3665              using -units since the original units may  have  been  lost.  In
3666              other  words,  do  not  assume  that  the  resolution  units are
3667              restored if the image has been saved to a file.
3668
3669       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3670              resize an image
3671
3672              This is an alias for the -geometry option and it behaves in  the
3673              same  manner. If the -filter option precedes the -resize option,
3674              the specified filter is used.
3675
3676              There are some exceptions:
3677
3678              When used as a composite option, -resize conveys  the  preferred
3679              size  of  the output image, while -geometry conveys the size and
3680              placement of the composite image within the main image.
3681
3682              When used as a montage option,  -resize  conveys  the  preferred
3683              size  of  the montage, while -geometry conveys information about
3684              the tiles.
3685
3686       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3687              roll an image vertically or horizontally
3688
3689              See -geometry for details the geometry specification.  The x and
3690              y offsets are not affected by the -gravity option.
3691
3692              A  negative x offset rolls the image left-to-right. A negative y
3693              offset rolls the image top-to-bottom.
3694
3695       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
3696              rotate the image
3697
3698              Positive angles rotate the image in a clockwise direction  while
3699              negative angles rotate counter-clockwise.
3700
3701              Use  > to rotate the image only if its width exceeds the height.
3702              < rotates the image only if its width is less than  the  height.
3703              For example, if you specify -rotate "-90>" and the image size is
3704              480x640, the image is not rotated.  However,  if  the  image  is
3705              640x480,  it  is  rotated  by  -90  degrees.  If you use > or <,
3706              enclose it in quotation marks to prevent it from being misinter‐
3707              preted as a file redirection.
3708
3709              Empty  triangles  left  over  from rotating the image are filled
3710              with the color defined as  background  (class  backgroundColor).
3711              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
3712              -fill option.
3713
3714       -sample <geometry>
3715              scale image using pixel sampling
3716
3717              See -geometry for  details  about  the  geometry  specification.
3718              -sample  ignores  the -filter selection if the -filter option is
3719              present.  Offsets,  if  present  in  the  geometry  string,  are
3720              ignored, and the -gravity option has no effect.
3721
3722       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
3723              chroma subsampling factors
3724
3725              This  option  specifies  the  sampling factors to be used by the
3726              DPX, JPEG, MPEG, or YUV encoders for  chroma  downsampling.  The
3727              sampling factor must be specified while reading the raw YUV for‐
3728              mat since it is not preserved in  the  file  header.   Industry-
3729              standard  video subsampling notation such as "4:2:2" may also be
3730              used to specify the sampling factors. "4:2:2" is equivalent to a
3731              specification of "2x1"
3732
3733              The  JPEG  decoder  obtains  the  original sampling factors (and
3734              quality settings) when a JPEG file is read. To re-use the origi‐
3735              nal  sampling factors (and quality setting) when JPEG is output,
3736              use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3737
3738       -scale <geometry>
3739              scale the image.
3740
3741              See -geometry for  details  about  the  geometry  specification.
3742              -scale  uses  a  simpler,  faster  algorithm, and it ignores the
3743              -filter selection if the -filter option is present.  Offsets, if
3744              present  in  the  geometry string, are ignored, and the -gravity
3745              option has no effect.
3746
3747       -scene <value>
3748              set scene number
3749
3750              This option sets the scene number of an image or the first image
3751              in an image sequence.
3752
3753       -scenes <value-value>
3754              range of image scene numbers to read
3755
3756              Each  image in the range is read with the filename followed by a
3757              period (.) and the decimal scene number.  You  can  change  this
3758              behavior  by  embedding a %d, %0Nd, %o, %0No, %x, or %0Nx printf
3759              format specification in the file name. For example,
3760
3761                  gm montage -scenes 5-7 image.miff montage.miff
3762
3763
3764              makes  a  montage  of  files  image.miff.5,  image.miff.6,   and
3765              image.miff.7, and
3766
3767                  gm animate -scenes 0-12 image%02d.miff
3768
3769
3770              animates files image00.miff, image01.miff, through image12.miff.
3771
3772       -screen
3773              specify the screen to capture
3774
3775              This  option  indicates that the GetImage request used to obtain
3776              the image should  be  done  on  the  root  window,  rather  than
3777              directly  on  the specified window.  In this way, you can obtain
3778              pieces of other windows that overlap the specified  window,  and
3779              more importantly, you can capture menus or other popups that are
3780              independent windows but appear over the specified window.
3781
3782       -set <attribute> <value>
3783              set an image attribute
3784
3785              Set a named image attribute.  The attribute is set on  the  cur‐
3786              rent (previously specified on command line) image.
3787
3788       +set <attribute>
3789              unset an image attribute
3790
3791              Unset  a  named  image attribute.  The attribute is removed from
3792              the current (previously specified on command line) image.
3793
3794       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
3795              segment an image
3796
3797              Segment an image by analyzing the histograms of the color compo‐
3798              nents  and identifying units that are homogeneous with the fuzzy
3799              c-means technique.
3800
3801              Segmentation is a very useful fast  and  and  approximate  color
3802              quantization algorithm for scanned printed pages or scanned car‐
3803              toons. It may also be used as a special effect. Specify  cluster
3804              threshold as the minimum percentage of total pixels in a cluster
3805              before it is considered valid.  For huge images containing small
3806              detail,  this  may need to be a tiny fraction of a percent (e.g.
3807              0.015) so that important detail is not lost.  Smoothing  thresh‐
3808              old  eliminates noise in the second derivative of the histogram.
3809              As the value is increased, you can expect a smoother second  de‐
3810              rivative.  The  default is 1.5. Add the -verbose option to see a
3811              dump of cluster statistics given the parameters used.  The  sta‐
3812              tistics may be used as a guide to help fine tune the options.
3813
3814       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
3815              shade the image using a distant light source
3816
3817              Specify  azimuth  and  elevation  as  the  position of the light
3818              source. Use +shade to return the shading results as a  grayscale
3819              image.
3820
3821       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
3822              shadow the montage
3823
3824       -shared-memory
3825              use shared memory
3826
3827              This  option specifies whether the utility should attempt to use
3828              shared memory for pixmaps.  GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
3829              shared  memory support, and the display must support the MIT-SHM
3830              extension.  Otherwise, this option is ignored.  The  default  is
3831              True.
3832
3833       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
3834              sharpen the image
3835
3836              Use  a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
3837              tion (sigma).
3838
3839       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
3840              shave pixels from the image edges
3841
3842              Specify the width of the region to be removed from both sides of
3843              the  image  and the height of the regions to be removed from top
3844              and bottom.
3845
3846       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
3847              shear the image along the X or Y axis
3848
3849              Use the specified positive or negative shear angle.
3850
3851              Shearing slides one edge of an image along the X or Y axis, cre‐
3852              ating a parallelogram. An X direction shear slides an edge along
3853              the X axis, while a Y direction shear slides an edge along the Y
3854              axis.  The  amount  of the shear is controlled by a shear angle.
3855              For X direction shears, x degrees is measured relative to the  Y
3856              axis,  and  similarly,  for Y direction shears y degrees is mea‐
3857              sured relative to the X axis.
3858
3859              Empty triangles left over from shearing  the  image  are  filled
3860              with  the  color  defined as background (class backgroundColor).
3861              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
3862              -fill option.
3863
3864       -silent
3865              operate silently
3866
3867       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
3868              width and height of the image
3869
3870              Use  this  option  to specify the width and height of raw images
3871              whose dimensions are unknown such as  GRAY,  RGB,  or  CMYK.  In
3872              addition  to  width and height, use -size with an offset to skip
3873              any header information in the image or tell the number of colors
3874              in a MAP image file, (e.g. -size 640x512+256).
3875
3876              For Photo CD images, choose from these sizes:
3877
3878                   192x128
3879                   384x256
3880                   768x512
3881                   1536x1024
3882                   3072x2048
3883
3884
3885              Finally, use this option to choose a particular resolution layer
3886              of a JBIG or JPEG image (e.g. -size 1024x768).
3887
3888       -snaps <value>
3889              number of screen snapshots
3890
3891              Use this option to grab more than one image from  the  X  server
3892              screen, to create an animation sequence.
3893
3894       -solarize <factor>
3895              negate all pixels above the threshold level
3896
3897              Specify  factor  as  the percent threshold of the intensity (0 -
3898              99.9%).
3899
3900              This option produces a solarization effect seen when exposing  a
3901              photographic film to light during the development process.
3902
3903       -spread <amount>
3904              displace image pixels by a random amount
3905
3906              Amount defines the size of the neighborhood around each pixel to
3907              choose a candidate pixel to swap.
3908
3909       -stegano <offset>
3910              hide watermark within an image
3911
3912              Use an offset to start the image hiding some  number  of  pixels
3913              from the beginning of the image.  Note this offset and the image
3914              size.  You will need this information to  recover  the  stegano‐
3915              graphic image (e.g. display -size 320x256+35 stegano:image.png).
3916
3917       -stereo
3918              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
3919
3920              The  left side of the stereo pair is saved as the red channel of
3921              the output image.  The right side is saved as the green channel.
3922              Red-green  stereo  glasses  are  required  to  properly view the
3923              stereo image.
3924
3925       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
3926
3927              All embedded profiles and text attributes are stripped from  the
3928              image.  This is useful for images used for the web, or when out‐
3929              put files need to be as small as possible
3930
3931              Be careful not to use this option to remove  author,  copyright,
3932              and  license  information  that  you are required to retain when
3933              redistributing an image.
3934
3935       -stroke <color>
3936              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
3937
3938              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
3939              -fill option.
3940
3941              See -draw for further details.
3942
3943       -strokewidth <value>
3944              set the stroke width
3945
3946              See -draw for further details.
3947
3948       -swirl <degrees>
3949              swirl image pixels about the center
3950
3951              Degrees defines the tightness of the swirl.
3952
3953       -text-font <name>
3954              font for writing fixed-width text
3955
3956              Specifies  the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
3957              writer style) formatted text.  The default is 14 point Courier.
3958
3959              You can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript,  True‐
3960              Type,  or X11 font.  For example, Courier.ttf is a TrueType font
3961              and x:fixed is X11.
3962
3963       -texture <filename>
3964              name of texture to tile onto the image background
3965
3966       -threshold <value>{%}
3967              threshold the image
3968
3969              Modify the image such that any pixel sample  with  an  intensity
3970              value  greater than the threshold is assigned the maximum inten‐
3971              sity (white), or otherwise is  assigned  the  minimum  intensity
3972              (black). If a percent prefix is applied, then the threshold is a
3973              percentage of the available range.
3974
3975              To efficiently create a black  and  white  image  from  a  color
3976              image, use
3977
3978                  gm convert -threshold 50% in.png out.png
3979
3980
3981              The  optimum threshold value depends on the nature of the image.
3982              In order to threshold individual  channels,  use  the  -operator
3983              subcommand  with  it's Threshold, Threshold-White, or Threshold-
3984              Black options.
3985
3986       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3987              resize an image (quickly)
3988
3989              The -thumbnail command resizes the image as quickly as possible,
3990              with  more  concern  for  speed  than  resulting  image quality.
3991              Regardless, resulting image quality  should  be  acceptable  for
3992              many  uses.   It  is  primarily  intended to be used to generate
3993              smaller versions of the image, but may also be used  to  enlarge
3994              the  image.   The -thumbnail geometry argument observes the same
3995              syntax and rules as it does for -resize.
3996
3997       -tile <filename>
3998              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
3999
4000       -tile <geometry>
4001              layout of images [montage]
4002
4003       -title <string>
4004              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4005
4006              Use this option to assign a specific title to the image. This is
4007              assigned  to  the image window and is typically displayed in the
4008              window title bar.  Optionally you can include  the  image  file‐
4009              name,  type,  width, height, Exif data, or other image attribute
4010              by embedding special format characters described under the -for‐
4011              mat option.
4012
4013              For example,
4014
4015                   -title "%m:%f %wx%h"
4016
4017
4018              produces  an  image title of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
4019              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
4020
4021       -transform
4022              transform the image
4023
4024              This option applies the transformation matrix  from  a  previous
4025              -affine option.
4026
4027                  gm convert -affine 2,2,-2,2,0,0 -transform bird.ppm bird.jpg
4028
4029
4030       -transparent <color>
4031              make this color transparent within the image
4032
4033              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
4034              -fill option.
4035
4036       -treedepth <value>
4037              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4038
4039              Normally, this integer value is zero or one. A value of zero  or
4040              one causes the use of an optimal tree depth for the color reduc‐
4041              tion algorithm
4042
4043              An optimal depth generally allows the best representation of the
4044              source  image with the fastest computational speed and the least
4045              amount of memory.  However, the default depth  is  inappropriate
4046              for  some  images. To assure the best representation, try values
4047              between 2 and 8 for this parameter.  Refer to quantize for  more
4048              details.
4049
4050              The -colors or -monochrome option, or writing to an image format
4051              which requires color reduction, is required for this  option  to
4052              take effect.
4053
4054       -trim  trim an image
4055
4056              This option removes any edges that are exactly the same color as
4057              the corner pixels.  Use -fuzz to make -trim  remove  edges  that
4058              are nearly the same color as the corner pixels.
4059
4060       -type <type>
4061              the image type
4062
4063              Choose  from:  Bilevel,  Grayscale, Palette, PaletteMatte, True‐
4064              Color, TrueColorMatte, ColorSeparation, ColorSeparationMatte, or
4065              Optimize.
4066
4067              Normally,  when  a  format supports different subformats such as
4068              bilevel, grayscale, palette, truecolor, and truecolor+alpha, the
4069              encoder  will  try  to  choose a suitable subformat based on the
4070              nature of the image. The -type option may be used to tailor  the
4071              output  subformat.  By  default the output subformat is based on
4072              readily available image information and is  usually  similar  to
4073              the input format.
4074
4075              Specify  -type Optimize in order to enable inspecting all pixels
4076              (if necessary) in order to find the  most  efficient  subformat.
4077              Inspecting  all of the pixels may be slow for very large images,
4078              particularly if they are stored in a disk cache. If an RGB image
4079              contains only gray pixels, then every pixel in the image must be
4080              inspected  in  order  to  decide  that  the  image  is  actually
4081              grayscale!
4082
4083              Sometimes a specific subformat is desired. For example, to force
4084              a JPEG image to be written in TrueColor RGB format  even  though
4085              only gray pixels are present, use
4086
4087                  gm convert bird.pgm -type TrueColor bird.jpg
4088
4089
4090              Similarly,  using -type TrueColorMatte will force the encoder to
4091              write an alpha channel even though the image is opaque,  if  the
4092              output format supports transparency.
4093
4094              Some  pseudo-formats  (e.g.  the  XC  format)  will  respect the
4095              requested type if it occurs previously on the command line.  For
4096              example, to obtain a DirectClass solid color canvas image rather
4097              than PsuedoClass, use
4098
4099                  gm convert -size 640x480 -type TrueColor xc:red red.miff
4100
4101
4102              Likewise, specify -type Bilevel, Grayscale, TrueColor, or  True‐
4103              ColorMatte  prior to reading a Postscript (or PDF file) in order
4104              to influence the type of image that Ghostcript returns.  Reading
4105              performance  will be dramatically improved for black/white Post‐
4106              script if Bilevel is specified, and will be considerably  faster
4107              if Grayscale is specified.
4108
4109       -update <seconds>
4110               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
4111
4112              Suppose  that while you are displaying an image the file that is
4113              currently displayed is over-written.  display will automatically
4114              detect  that the input file has been changed and update the dis‐
4115              played image accordingly.
4116
4117       -units <type>
4118              the units of image resolution
4119
4120              Choose from: Undefined, PixelsPerInch,  or  PixelsPerCentimeter.
4121              This  option  is  normally used in conjunction with the -density
4122              option.
4123
4124       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
4125              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
4126
4127              The -unsharp option sharpens an image. The  image  is  convolved
4128              with a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
4129              tion (sigma). For reasonable results, radius  should  be  larger
4130              than  sigma. Use a radius of 0 to have the method select a suit‐
4131              able radius.
4132
4133              The parameters are:
4134
4135
4136               radius
4137
4138
4139                    The radius of the Gaussian, in pixels,  not  counting  the
4140                    center pixel (default 0).
4141
4142               sigma
4143
4144
4145                    The standard deviation of the Gaussian, in pixels (default
4146                    1.0).
4147
4148               amount
4149
4150
4151                    The percentage of the difference between the original  and
4152                    the  blur  image  that  is  added  back  into the original
4153                    (default 1.0).
4154
4155               threshold
4156
4157
4158                    The threshold, as a fraction of MaxRGB,  needed  to  apply
4159                    the difference amount (default 0.05).
4160
4161
4162
4163
4164       -use-pixmap
4165              use the pixmap
4166
4167       -verbose
4168              print detailed information about the image
4169
4170              This  information  is  printed:  image scene number; image name;
4171              image size; the image class (DirectClass  or  PseudoClass);  the
4172              total number of unique colors; and the number of seconds to read
4173              and transform the image. If the image is DirectClass, the  total
4174              number  of  unique  colors  is  not displayed unless -verbose is
4175              specified twice since it may take quite a long time to  compute,
4176              particularly  for deep images.  If the image is PseudoClass then
4177              its pixels are defined by indexes into a colormap. If the  image
4178              is  DirectClass then each pixel includes a complete and indepen‐
4179              dent color specification.
4180
4181              If -colors is also specified, the total  unique  colors  in  the
4182              image  and  color  reduction  error values are printed. Refer to
4183              quantize for a description of these values.
4184
4185       -version
4186              print GraphicsMagick version string
4187
4188       -view <string>
4189              FlashPix viewing parameters
4190
4191       -virtual-pixel <method>
4192              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
4193
4194              This option defines "virtual pixels" for use in operations  that
4195              can access pixels outside the boundaries of an image.
4196
4197              Choose from these methods:
4198
4199
4200               Constant
4201
4202
4203                    Use the image background color.
4204
4205               Edge
4206
4207
4208                    Extend the edge pixel toward infinity (default).
4209
4210               Mirror
4211
4212
4213                    Mirror the image.
4214
4215               Tile
4216
4217
4218                    Tile the image.
4219
4220
4221
4222
4223               This  option affects operations that use virtual pixels such as
4224               -blur, -sharpen, -wave, etc.
4225
4226       -visual <type>
4227              animate images using this X visual type
4228
4229              Choose from these visual classes:
4230
4231                   StaticGray
4232                   GrayScale
4233                   StaticColor
4234                   PseudoColor
4235                   TrueColor
4236                   DirectColor
4237                   default
4238                   visual id
4239
4240
4241              The X server must support the visual you  choose,  otherwise  an
4242              error  occurs.   If  a visual is not specified, the visual class
4243              that can display the most simultaneous  colors  on  the  default
4244              screen is chosen.
4245
4246       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
4247              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
4248
4249       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
4250              alter an image along a sine wave
4251
4252              Specify amplitude and wavelength of the wave.
4253
4254       -white-point <x>,<y>
4255              chromaticity white point
4256
4257       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
4258              pixels above the threshold become white
4259
4260              Use  -white-threshold to set pixels with values above the speci‐
4261              fied threshold to maximum value (white). If only  one  value  is
4262              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
4263              intensity thresholding is used. If the  color  threshold  values
4264              are  not  identical then channel-based thresholding is used, and
4265              color distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g.  -1)
4266              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
4267              a channel later  in  the  list.  If  a  percent  (%)  symbol  is
4268              appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
4269              range.
4270
4271       -window <id>
4272              make image the background of a window
4273
4274              id can be a window id or name.  Specify root to select X's  root
4275              window as the target window.
4276
4277              By  default the image is tiled onto the background of the target
4278              window.   If backdrop or -geometry are specified, the  image  is
4279              surrounded  by  the  background color.  Refer to X RESOURCES for
4280              details.
4281
4282              The image will not display on the root window if the  image  has
4283              more  unique colors than the target window colormap allows.  Use
4284              -colors to reduce the number of colors.
4285
4286       -window-group
4287              specify the window group
4288
4289       -write <filename>
4290              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
4291
4292              The current image is written to the specified filename and  then
4293              processing continues using that image. The following is an exam‐
4294              ple of how several sizes of an image may  be  generated  in  one
4295              command (repeat as often as needed):
4296
4297                  gm convert input.jpg -resize 50% -write input50.jpg \
4298                            -resize 25% input25.jpg
4299
4300
4301       -write <filename>
4302              write the image to a file [display]
4303
4304              If  filename  already exists, you will be prompted as to whether
4305              it should be overwritten.
4306
4307              By default, the image is written in the format that it was  read
4308              in  as.   To  specify a particular image format, prefix filename
4309              with the image type and a colon (e.g., ps:image) or specify  the
4310              image type as the filename suffix (e.g., image.ps). Specify file
4311              as - for standard output. If file has the extension .Z  or  .gz,
4312              the file size is compressed using compress or gzip respectively.
4313              Precede the image file name with | to pipe to a system command.
4314
4315              Use -compress to specify the type of image compression.
4316
4317              The equivalent X  resource  for  this  option  is  writeFilename
4318              (class WriteFilename).  See "X Resources", below, for details.
4319

ENVIRONMENT

4321       COLUMNS
4322              Output  screen  width. Used when formatting text for the screen.
4323              Many Unix systems keep this shell variable up to  date,  but  it
4324              may  need  to be explicitly exported in order for GraphicsMagick
4325              to see it.
4326
4327       DISPLAY
4328              X11 display ID (host, display number, and  screen  in  the  form
4329              hostname:display.screen).
4330
4331       HOME   Location  of  user's  home  directory. For security reasons, now
4332              only observed by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do
4333              not have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.  When
4334              supported, GraphicsMagick searches for  configuration  files  in
4335              $HOME/.magick  if  the  directory  exists. See MAGICK_CODER_MOD‐
4336              ULE_PATH, MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH,  and  MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4337              if more flexibility is needed.
4338
4339       MAGICK_ACCESS_MONITOR
4340              When  set  to TRUE, command line monitor mode (enabled by -moni‐
4341              tor) will also show files accessed (including  temporary  files)
4342              and any external commands which are executed. This is useful for
4343              debugging, but also illustrates arguments made available  to  an
4344              access handler registered by the MagickSetConfirmAccessHandler()
4345              C library function.
4346
4347       MAGICK_CODER_STABILITY
4348              The minimum coder stability level before it will  be  used.  The
4349              available levels are PRIMARY, STABLE, UNSTABLE, and BROKEN.  The
4350              default minimum level is UNSTABLE, which means that  all  avail‐
4351              able  working coders will be used. The purpose of this option is
4352              to reduce the security exposure (or apparent complexity) due  to
4353              the  huge  number  of  formats  supported. Coders at the PRIMARY
4354              level are commonly used formats with very well maintained imple‐
4355              mentations. Coders at the STABLE level are reasonably well main‐
4356              tained but represent less used formats. Coders at  the  UNSTABLE
4357              level  either  have weak implementations, the file format itself
4358              is weak, or the probability the coder will be needed is  vanish‐
4359              ingly  small.  Coders at the BROKEN level are known to often not
4360              work properly or might not be useful in their current  state  at
4361              all.
4362
4363       MAGICK_CODER_MODULE_PATH
4364              Search  path  to  use when searching for image format coder mod‐
4365              ules.  This path allows the user to arbitrarily extend the image
4366              formats  supported  by GraphicsMagick by adding loadable modules
4367              to an arbitrary location  rather  than  copying  them  into  the
4368              GraphicsMagick  installation  directory.  The  formatting of the
4369              search path is similar to operating system  search  paths  (i.e.
4370              colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited for Microsoft
4371              Windows). This user specified search path is used before  trying
4372              the default search path.
4373
4374       MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH
4375              Search  path  to  use  when  searching  for configuration (.mgk)
4376              files.  The formatting of the search path is similar to  operat‐
4377              ing  system  search  paths  (i.e.  colon delimited for Unix, and
4378              semi-colon delimited for Microsoft Windows). This user specified
4379              search path is used before trying the default search path.
4380
4381       MAGICK_DEBUG
4382              Debug  options  (see -debug for details).  Setting the configure
4383              debug option via an environment variable (e.g. MAGICK_DEBUG=con‐
4384              figure) is necessary to see the complete initialization process,
4385              which includes searching for configuration files.
4386
4387       MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4388              Search path to use when searching  for  filter  process  modules
4389              (invoked via -process). This path allows the user to arbitrarily
4390              extend GraphicsMagick's image processing functionality by adding
4391              loadable  modules  to  an arbitrary location rather than copying
4392              them into the GraphicsMagick installation directory. The format‐
4393              ting  of  the  search path is similar to operating system search
4394              paths (i.e. colon delimited for Unix, and  semi-colon  delimited
4395              for  Microsoft Windows). This user specified search path is used
4396              before trying the default search path.
4397
4398       MAGICK_GHOSTSCRIPT_PATH
4399              For Microsoft Windows,  specify  the  path  to  the  Ghostscript
4400              installation  rather  than searching for it via the Windows reg‐
4401              istry.  This helps in case Ghostscript is not installed via  the
4402              Ghostscript  Windows  installer  or  the user wants more control
4403              over the Ghostscript used.
4404
4405       MAGICK_HOME
4406              Path to  top  of  GraphicsMagick  installation  directory.  Only
4407              observed  by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do not
4408              have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.
4409
4410       MAGICK_MMAP_READ
4411              If MAGICK_MMAP_READ is set to TRUE, GraphicsMagick will  attempt
4412              to  memory-map the input file for reading. This usually substan‐
4413              tially improves repeated read  performance  since  the  file  is
4414              already  in  memory  after the first time it has been read. How‐
4415              ever, testing shows that performance may be  reduced  for  files
4416              accessed  for  the  first  time since data is accessed via page-
4417              faults (upon first access) and many operating systems fail to do
4418              sequential  read-ahead  of memory mapped files, and particularly
4419              if those files are accessed over a network.  If many large input
4420              files  are  read, then enabling this option may harm performance
4421              by overloading the operating system's VM system as it then needs
4422              to free unmapped pages and map new ones.
4423
4424       MAGICK_IO_FSYNC
4425              If  MAGICK_IO_FSYNC  is  set  to  TRUE, then GraphicsMagick will
4426              request that the output file is fully flushed  and  synchronized
4427              to  disk  when  it is closed. This incurs a performance penalty,
4428              but has the benefit that  if  the  power  fails  or  the  system
4429              crashes,  the  file  should be valid on disk. If image files are
4430              referenced from a database, then this option helps  assure  that
4431              the files referenced by the database are valid.
4432
4433       MAGICK_IOBUF_SIZE
4434              The  amount  of I/O buffering (in bytes) to use when reading and
4435              writing encoded files. The default is 16384, which  is  observed
4436              to work well for many cases. The best value for a local filesys‐
4437              tem is usually the the native filesystem block size (e.g.  4096,
4438              8192,  or  even 131,072 for ZFS) in order to minimize the number
4439              of physical disk  I/O  operations.   I/O  performance  to  files
4440              accessed over a network may benefit significantly by tuning this
4441              option. Larger values are not necessarily better  (they  may  be
4442              slower!),  and  there  is  rarely  any benefit from using values
4443              larger than 32768. Use convert's -verbose  option  in  order  to
4444              evaluate read and write rates in pixels per second while keeping
4445              in mind that the operating system will try  to  cache  files  in
4446              RAM.
4447
4448       MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK
4449              Maximum amount of disk space allowed for use by the pixel cache.
4450
4451       MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES
4452              Maximum number of open files.
4453
4454       MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP
4455              Maximum  size  of  a  memory  mapped  file allocation.  A memory
4456              mapped file consumes memory when the file is accessed,  although
4457              the system may reclaim such memory when needed.
4458
4459       MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY
4460              Maximum amount of memory to allocate from the heap.
4461
4462       MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS
4463              Maximum  number  of total pixels (image rows times image colums)
4464              to allow for any image which is requested to be created or read.
4465              This  is  useful  to place a limit on how large an image may be.
4466              If the input image file has image  dimensions  larger  than  the
4467              pixel  limit,  then the image memory allocation is denied and an
4468              error is returned immediately.  This is a  per-image  limit  and
4469              does  not limit the total number of pixels due to multiple image
4470              frames/pages (e.g. multi-page document or an animation).
4471
4472       MAGICK_LIMIT_WIDTH
4473              Maximum pixel width of an image read, or created.
4474
4475       MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT
4476              Maximum pixel height of an image read, or created.
4477
4478       MAGICK_TMPDIR
4479              Path to directory where GraphicsMagick  should  write  temporary
4480              files. The default is to use the system default, or the location
4481              set by TMPDIR.
4482
4483       TMPDIR For POSIX-compatible systems (Unix-compatible), the path to  the
4484              directory  where  all applications should write temporary files.
4485              Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR if it is set.
4486
4487       TMP or TEMP
4488              For Microsoft Windows, the path to the directory where  applica‐
4489              tions  should write temporary files. Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR
4490              if it is set.
4491
4492       OMP_NUM_THREADS
4493              As per the OpenMP standard, this specifies the number of threads
4494              to use in parallel regions. Some compilers default the number of
4495              threads to use to the number of processor cores available  while
4496              others  default to just one thread. See the OpenMP specification
4497              for other standard adjustments and your  compiler's  manual  for
4498              vendor-specific settings.
4499

CONFIGURATION FILES

4501       GraphicsMagick uses a number of XML format configuration files:
4502
4503       colors.mgk
4504              colors configuration file
4505
4506                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4507                <colormap>
4508                  <color name="AliceBlue" red="240" green="248" blue="255"
4509                         compliance="SVG, X11, XPM" />
4510                </colormap>
4511
4512
4513       delegates.mgk
4514              delegates configuration file
4515
4516       log.mgk
4517              logging configuration file
4518
4519                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4520                <magicklog>
4521                  <log events="None" />
4522                  <log output="stdout" />
4523                  <log filename="Magick-%d.log" />
4524                  <log generations="3" />
4525                  <log limit="2000" />
4526                  <log format="%t %r %u %p %m/%f/%l/%d:\n  %e"  />
4527                </magicklog>
4528
4529
4530       modules.mgk
4531              loadable modules configuration file
4532
4533                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4534                <modulemap>
4535                  <module magick="8BIM" name="META" />
4536                </modulemap>
4537
4538
4539       type.mgk
4540              master type (fonts) configuration file
4541
4542                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4543                <typemap>
4544                  <include file="type-windows.mgk" />
4545                  <type
4546                    name="AvantGarde-Book"
4547                    fullname="AvantGarde Book"
4548                    family="AvantGarde"
4549                    foundry="URW"
4550                    weight="400"
4551                    style="normal"
4552                    stretch="normal"
4553                    format="type1"
4554                    metrics="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.afm"
4555                    glyphs="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.pfb"
4556                  />
4557                </typemap>
4558
4559

GM ANIMATE

4561       Animate  displays  a sequence of images on any workstation display run‐
4562       ning an X server. animate first determines the hardware capabilities of
4563       the  workstation.  If  the  number of unique colors in an image is less
4564       than or equal to the number the workstation can support, the  image  is
4565       displayed  in  an X window. Otherwise the number of colors in the image
4566       is first reduced to match  the  color  resolution  of  the  workstation
4567       before it is displayed.
4568
4569       This  means  that a continuous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel image can display
4570       on a 8 bit pseudo-color device or monochrome device. In most  instances
4571       the  reduced color image closely resembles the original. Alternatively,
4572       a monochrome or pseudo-color image sequence can display on  a  continu‐
4573       ous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel device.
4574
4575       To help prevent color flashing on X server visuals that have colormaps,
4576       animate creates a single colormap from the image sequence. This can  be
4577       rather  time consuming. You can speed this operation up by reducing the
4578       colors in the image before you "animate" them.  Use  mogrify  to  color
4579       reduce  the  images  to  a single colormap. See mogrify(1) for details.
4580       Alternatively, you can use a Standard Colormap; or a static, direct, or
4581       true  color  visual.  You can define a Standard Colormap with xstdcmap.
4582       See xstdcmap(1) for details. This method is recommended for colormapped
4583       X server because it eliminates the need to compute a global colormap.
4584

EXAMPLES

4586       To animate a set of images of a cockatoo, use:
4587
4588           gm animate cockatoo.*
4589
4590
4591       To  animate a cockatoo image sequence while using the Standard Colormap
4592       best, use:
4593
4594           xstdcmap -best
4595           gm animate -map best cockatoo.*
4596
4597
4598       To animate an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a  back‐
4599       drop, use:
4600
4601
4602           gm animate +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.*
4603
4604

OPTIONS

4606       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
4607
4608
4609       -authenticate <string>
4610              decrypt image with this password
4611
4612       -backdrop
4613              display the image centered on a backdrop.
4614
4615       -background <color>
4616              the background color
4617
4618       -bordercolor <color>
4619              the border color
4620
4621       -borderwidth <geometry>
4622              the border width
4623
4624       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4625              remove pixels from the interior of an image
4626
4627       -colormap <type>
4628              define the colormap type
4629
4630       -colors <value>
4631              preferred number of colors in the image
4632
4633       -colorspace <value>
4634              the type of colorspace
4635
4636       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4637              preferred size and location of the cropped image
4638
4639       -debug <events>
4640              enable debug printout
4641
4642       -define <key>{=<value>},...
4643              add coder/decoder specific options
4644
4645       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
4646              display the next image after pausing
4647
4648       -density <width>x<height>
4649              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
4650
4651       -depth <value>
4652              depth of the image
4653
4654       -display <host:display[.screen]>
4655              specifies the X server to contact
4656
4657       -dispose <method>
4658              GIF disposal method
4659
4660       -dither
4661              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
4662
4663       -font <name>
4664              use this font when annotating the image with text
4665
4666       -foreground <color>
4667              define the foreground color
4668
4669       -gamma <value>
4670              level of gamma correction
4671
4672       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
4673              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
4674
4675       -help  print usage instructions
4676
4677       -iconGeometry <geometry>
4678              specify the icon geometry
4679
4680       -iconic
4681              iconic animation
4682
4683       -interlace <type>
4684              the type of interlacing scheme
4685
4686       -limit <type> <value>
4687              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
4688              resource limit
4689
4690       -log <string>
4691              Specify format for debug log
4692
4693       -map <type>
4694              display image using this type.
4695
4696       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
4697
4698       -mattecolor <color>
4699              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
4700
4701       -monitor
4702              show progress indication
4703
4704       -monochrome
4705              transform the image to black and white
4706
4707       -name  name an image
4708
4709       -noop  NOOP (no option)
4710
4711       -pause <seconds>
4712              pause between animation loops [animate]
4713
4714       -remote
4715              perform a X11 remote operation
4716
4717       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
4718              rotate the image
4719
4720       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
4721              chroma subsampling factors
4722
4723       -scenes <value-value>
4724              range of image scene numbers to read
4725
4726       -shared-memory
4727              use shared memory
4728
4729       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
4730              width and height of the image
4731
4732       -text-font <name>
4733              font for writing fixed-width text
4734
4735       -title <string>
4736              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4737
4738       -treedepth <value>
4739              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4740
4741       -trim  trim an image
4742
4743       -type <type>
4744              the image type
4745
4746       -verbose
4747              print detailed information about the image
4748
4749       -version
4750              print GraphicsMagick version string
4751
4752       -visual <type>
4753              animate images using this X visual type
4754
4755       -window <id>
4756              make image the background of a window
4757
4758              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
4759              above.
4760
4761
4762              Any option you specify on the command line remains in effect for
4763              the group of images following it, until the group is  terminated
4764              by  the appearance of any option or -noop.  For example, to ani‐
4765              mate three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with  an
4766              unlimited  number  of colors, and the third with only 16 colors,
4767              use:
4768
4769
4770                  gm animate -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
4771                           -colors 16 cockatoo.3
4772
4773
4774              Animate options can appear on the command  line  or  in  your  X
4775              resources  file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede
4776              values specified in your X resources file.  Image filenames  may
4777              appear  in  any order on the command line if the image format is
4778              MIFF (refer to miff(5) and the scene keyword is specified in the
4779              image.  Otherwise  the  images  will  display  in the order they
4780              appear on the command line.
4781

MOUSE BUTTONS

4783       Press any button to map or unmap the Command widget. See the next  sec‐
4784       tion for more information about the Command widget.
4785

COMMAND WIDGET

4787       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
4788
4789           Animate
4790
4791               Open
4792               Play
4793               Step
4794               Repeat
4795               Auto Reverse
4796
4797           Speed
4798
4799               Faster
4800               Slower
4801
4802           Direction
4803
4804               Forward
4805               Reverse
4806
4807           Image Info
4808           Help
4809           Quit
4810
4811
4812       Menu  items  with  a indented triangle have a sub-menu. They are repre‐
4813       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
4814       pointer  to  the appropriate menu and press a button and drag. When you
4815       find the desired sub-menu item, release the button and the  command  is
4816       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
4817       execute a particular command.
4818

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

4820               Ctl+O
4821
4822                    Press to load an image from a file.
4823               space
4824
4825                    Press to display the next image in the sequence.
4826               <
4827
4828                    Press to speed-up the display of  the  images.   Refer  to
4829                    -delay for more information.
4830               >
4831
4832                    Press  to slow the display of the images.  Refer to -delay
4833                    for more information.
4834               ?
4835
4836                    Press to display information about the image.   Press  any
4837                    key or button to erase the information.
4838                    This  information is printed: image name;  image size; and
4839                    the total number of unique colors in the image.
4840               F1
4841
4842                    Press to display helpful information about animate(1).
4843               Ctl-q
4844
4845                    Press to discard all images and exit program.
4846
4847

X RESOURCES

4849       Animate options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resource
4850       file.  Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
4851       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
4852
4853       All animate options have a corresponding X resource. In  addition,  the
4854       animate program uses the following X resources:
4855
4856               background (class Background)
4857
4858
4859                    Specifies  the preferred color to use for the Image window
4860                    background. The default is #ccc.
4861               borderColor (class BorderColor)
4862
4863
4864                    Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image  window
4865                    border. The default is #ccc.
4866               borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
4867
4868
4869                    Specifies  the width in pixels of the Image window border.
4870                    The default is 2.
4871               font (class Font or FontList)
4872
4873
4874                    Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in  normal
4875                    formatted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
4876               foreground (class Foreground)
4877
4878
4879                    Specifies  the  preferred color to use for text within the
4880                    Image window.  The default is black.
4881               geometry (class geometry)
4882
4883
4884                    Specifies the preferred size and  position  of  the  image
4885                    window.  It  is  not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
4886                    agers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style.  A
4887                    negative  x  offset is measured from the right edge of the
4888                    screen to the right edge of the icon,  and  a  negative  y
4889                    offset  is  measured from the bottom edge of the screen to
4890                    the bottom edge of the icon.
4891               iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
4892
4893
4894                    Specifies the preferred size and position of the  applica‐
4895                    tion  when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by all
4896                    window managers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in  the
4897                    same manner as in class Geometry.
4898               iconic (class Iconic)
4899
4900
4901                    This  resource  indicates  that  you would prefer that the
4902                    application's windows initially not be visible as  if  the
4903                    windows  had  be immediately iconified by you. Window man‐
4904                    agers may choose not to honor the application's request.
4905               matteColor (class MatteColor)
4906
4907
4908                    Specify the color of windows. It is  used  for  the  back‐
4909                    grounds  of  windows,  menus,  and notices. A 3D effect is
4910                    achieved by using highlight and shadow colors derived from
4911                    this color. Default value: #ddd.
4912               name (class Name)
4913
4914
4915                    This resource specifies the name under which resources for
4916                    the application should be found. This resource  is  useful
4917                    in  shell aliases to distinguish between invocations of an
4918                    application, without resorting to creating links to  alter
4919                    the  executable  file name. The default is the application
4920                    name.
4921               sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
4922
4923
4924                    This resource specifies whether animate should attempt use
4925                    shared  memory  for  pixmaps. ImageMagick must be compiled
4926                    with shared memory support, and the display  must  support
4927                    the   MIT-SHM   extension.  Otherwise,  this  resource  is
4928                    ignored. The default is True.
4929               text_font (class textFont)
4930
4931
4932                    Specifies the name of the preferred font to use  in  fixed
4933                    (typewriter style) formatted text. The default is 14 point
4934                    Courier.
4935               title (class Title)
4936
4937
4938                    This resource specifies the title to be used for the Image
4939                    window.  This  information  is  sometimes used by a window
4940                    manager to provide some sort  of  header  identifying  the
4941                    window. The default is the image file name.
4942
4943

GM BATCH

DESCRIPTION

4946       batch  executes  an  arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
4947       vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order  to  improve
4948       execution  efficiency,  and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
4949       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
4950

EXAMPLES

4952        To drive 'gm batch' using a shell script (or a program written in  any
4953       language),  have the script/program send commands to 'gm batch' via its
4954       standard input.  Specify that standard input should be  used  by  using
4955       '-'  as the file name.  The following example converts all files match‐
4956       ing '*.jpg' to TIFF format while rotating each file by 90  degrees  and
4957       stripping  all  embedded profiles.  The shell script syntax is standard
4958       Unix shell:
4959
4960         for file in *.jpg
4961         do
4962           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4963           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4964           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4965         done | gm batch -echo on -feedback on -
4966
4967
4968       We can accomplish the same as the previous example by putting  all  the
4969       commands  in  a text file and then specifying the name of the text file
4970       as the script to execute:
4971
4972         for file in *.jpg
4973         do
4974           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4975           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4976           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4977         done > script.txt
4978         gm batch -echo on -feedback on script.txt
4979
4980

OPTIONS

4982       Options are processed from left to right and  must  appear  before  any
4983       filename argument.
4984
4985       -echo on|off
4986              command echo on or off
4987
4988              Specify on to enable echoing commands to standard output as they
4989              are read or off to disable.  The default is off.
4990
4991       -escape unix|windows
4992              Parse using unix or windows syntax
4993
4994              Commands must be parsed from the input stream and escaping needs
4995              to be used to protect spaces or quoting characters in the input.
4996              Specify unix to use unix-style command line parsing  or  windows
4997              for  Microsoft  Windows command shell style parsing. The default
4998              depends on if the software is compiled for Microsoft Windows  or
4999              for  a Unix-type system (including Cygwin on Microsoft Windows).
5000              It is recommended to use unix syntax because it is more powerful
5001              and more portable.
5002
5003       -fail text
5004              text to print if a command fails
5005
5006              When  feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print when
5007              the command fails.  The default text is FAIL.
5008
5009       -feedback on|off
5010              enable error feedback
5011
5012              Print text (see -pass and -fail  options)  feedback  after  each
5013              command to indicate the result, the default is off.
5014
5015       -help
5016
5017              Prints batch command help.
5018
5019       -pass text
5020              text to print if a command passes
5021
5022              When  feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print when
5023              the command passes.  The default text is PASS.
5024
5025       -prompt text
5026              Prompt text to use for command line
5027
5028              If no filename argument was specified, a simple  command  prompt
5029              appears  where  you  may  enter  GraphicsMagick  commands.   The
5030              default prompt is GM>.  Use this option to change the prompt  to
5031              something else.
5032
5033       -stop-on-error on|off
5034              Specify if command processing stops on error
5035
5036              Normally command processing continues if a command encounters an
5037              error.  Specify -stop-on-error on to cause  processing  to  quit
5038              immediately on error.
5039

GM BENCHMARK

DESCRIPTION

5042       benchmark  executes  an arbitrary gm utility command (e.g. convert) for
5043       one or more loops, and/or a specified execution time, and reports  many
5044       execution metrics.  For builds using OpenMP, a mode is provided to exe‐
5045       cute the benchmark with an increasing number of threads and  provide  a
5046       report  of speedup and multi-thread execution efficiency.  If benchmark
5047       is used to execute a command without any additional benchmark  options,
5048       then the command is run once.
5049

EXAMPLES

5051       To obtain benchmark information for a single execution of a command:
5052
5053           gm benchmark convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5054
5055       To obtain benchmark information from 100 iterations of the command:
5056
5057           gm benchmark -iterations 100 convert input.ppm \
5058             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5059
5060       To obtain benchmark information by iterating the command until a speci‐
5061       fied amount of time (in seconds) has been consumed:
5062
5063           gm benchmark -duration 30 convert input.ppm \
5064             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5065
5066       To obtain a full  performance  report  with  an  increasing  number  of
5067       threads  (1-32  threads,  stepping  the  number of threads by four each
5068       time):
5069
5070           gm benchmark -duration 3 -stepthreads 4 convert \
5071             input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm
5072
5073       Here is the interpretation of the output:
5074
5075           threads - number of threads used.
5076           iter - number of command iterations executed.
5077           user - total user time consumed.
5078           total - total elapsed time consumed.
5079           iter/s - number of command iterations per second.
5080           iter/cpu - amount of CPU time consumed per iteration.
5081           speedup - speedup compared with one thread.
5082           karp-flatt - Karp-Flatt measure of speedup efficiency.
5083
5084       Please note that the reported "speedup" is based on the execution  time
5085       of  just  one thread.  A preliminary warm-up pass is used before timing
5086       the first loop in order to ensure that the CPU is brought out of power-
5087       saving  modes  and  that system caches are warmed up.  Most modern CPUs
5088       provide a "turbo" mode where the CPU clock speed is increased (e.g.  by
5089       a  factor  of  two)  when only one or two cores are active.  If the CPU
5090       grows excessively hot (due to insufficient cooling), then it  may  dial
5091       back  its  clock  rates as a form of thermal management.  These factors
5092       result in an under-reporting of speedup compared to if "turbo" mode was
5093       disabled  and  the CPU does not need to worry about thermal management.
5094       The powertop utility available under Linux and Solaris provides  a  way
5095       to observe CPU core clock rates while a benchmark is running.
5096

OPTIONS

5098        Options  are  processed  from left to right and must appear before any
5099       argument.
5100
5101       -duration duration
5102              duration to run benchmark Specify the number of seconds  to  run
5103              the  benchmark.  The  command  is  executed repeatedly until the
5104              specified amount of time has elapsed.
5105
5106       -help
5107
5108              Prints benchmark command help.
5109
5110       -iterations loops
5111              number of command iterations Specify the number of iterations to
5112              run  the benchmark. The command is executed repeatedly until the
5113              specified number of iterations has been reached.
5114
5115       -rawcsv
5116              Print results in CSV format Print results in  a  comma-separated
5117              value  (CSV)  format  which  is  easy  to  parse for plotting or
5118              importing into a spreadsheet or database.  The  values  reported
5119              are threads, iterations, user_time, and elapsed_time.
5120
5121       -stepthreads step
5122              execute a per-thread benchmark ramp
5123               Execute a per-thread benchmark ramp, incrementing the number of
5124              threads at each step by the specified value.  The maximum number
5125              of  threads  is taken from the standard OMP_NUM_THREADS environ‐
5126              ment variable.
5127

GM COMPARE

5129       compare compares two  similar  images  using  a  specified  statistical
5130       method (see -metric) and/or by writing a difference image (-file), with
5131       the altered pixels annotated using a specified method (see  -highlight-
5132       style)  and color (see -highlight-color). Reference-image is the origi‐
5133       nal image and compare-image is the (possibly)  altered  version,  which
5134       should have the same dimensions as reference-image.
5135

EXAMPLES

5137       To  compare two images using Mean Square Error (MSE) statistical analy‐
5138       sis use:
5139
5140           gm compare -metric mse original.miff compare.miff
5141
5142
5143       To create an annotated difference image use:
5144
5145           gm compare -highlight-style assign -highlight-color purple \
5146             -file diff.miff original.miff compare.miff
5147
5148

OPTIONS

5150       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5151       the  command  line  remains  in effect only for the image that follows.
5152       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5153
5154       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5155
5156
5157       -authenticate <string>
5158              decrypt image with this password
5159
5160       -colorspace <value>
5161              the type of colorspace
5162
5163       -debug <events>
5164              enable debug printout
5165
5166       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5167              add coder/decoder specific options
5168
5169       -density <width>x<height>
5170              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5171
5172       -depth <value>
5173              depth of the image
5174
5175       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5176              specifies the X server to contact
5177
5178       -endian <type>
5179              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5180
5181       -file <filename>
5182              write annotated difference image to file
5183
5184       -help  print usage instructions
5185
5186       -highlight-color <color>
5187              pixel annotation color
5188
5189       -highlight-style <style>
5190              pixel annotation style
5191
5192       -interlace <type>
5193              the type of interlacing scheme
5194
5195       -limit <type> <value>
5196              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
5197              resource limit
5198
5199       -log <string>
5200              Specify format for debug log
5201
5202       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5203
5204       -maximum-error <limit>
5205              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
5206
5207       -metric <metric>
5208              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
5209
5210       -monitor
5211              show progress indication
5212
5213       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5214              chroma subsampling factors
5215
5216       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5217              width and height of the image
5218
5219       -type <type>
5220              the image type
5221
5222       -verbose
5223              print detailed information about the image
5224
5225       -version
5226              print GraphicsMagick version string
5227
5228              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
5229              above.
5230
5231

GM COMPOSITE

5233       composite composites (combines) images to  create  new  images.   base-
5234       image  is the base image and change-image contains the changes.  ouput-
5235       image is the result, and normally has  the  same  dimensions  as  base-
5236       image.
5237
5238
5239       The  optional mask-image can be used to provide opacity information for
5240       change-image when it has none or if you want a different mask.  A  mask
5241       image  is typically grayscale and the same size as base-image. If mask-
5242       image is not grayscale, it is converted to grayscale and the  resulting
5243       intensities are used as opacity information.
5244

EXAMPLES

5246       To composite an image of a cockatoo with a perch, use:
5247
5248           gm composite cockatoo.miff perch.ras composite.miff
5249
5250
5251       To compute the difference between images in a series, use:
5252
5253           gm composite -compose difference series.2 series.1
5254                     difference.miff
5255
5256
5257       To  composite  an image of a cockatoo with a perch starting at location
5258       (100,150), use:
5259
5260           gm composite -geometry +100+150 cockatoo.miff
5261                     perch.ras composite.miff
5262
5263
5264       To tile a logo across your image of a cockatoo, use
5265
5266           gm convert +shade 30x60 cockatoo.miff mask.miff
5267           gm composite -compose bumpmap -tile logo.png
5268                     cockatoo.miff mask.miff composite.miff
5269
5270
5271       To composite a red, green, and blue color plane into a single composite
5272       image, try
5273
5274           gm composite -compose CopyGreen green.png red.png
5275                     red-green.png
5276           gm composite -compose CopyBlue blue.png red-green.png
5277                     gm composite.png
5278
5279

OPTIONS

5281       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5282       the command line remains in effect only for  the  image  that  follows.
5283       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5284
5285       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5286
5287
5288       -authenticate <string>
5289              decrypt image with this password
5290
5291       -background <color>
5292              the background color
5293
5294       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5295              blue chromaticity primary point
5296
5297       -colors <value>
5298              preferred number of colors in the image
5299
5300       -colorspace <value>
5301              the type of colorspace
5302
5303       -comment <string>
5304              annotate an image with a comment
5305
5306       -compose <operator>
5307              the type of image composition
5308
5309       -compress <type>
5310              the type of image compression
5311
5312       -debug <events>
5313              enable debug printout
5314
5315       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5316              add coder/decoder specific options
5317
5318       -density <width>x<height>
5319              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5320
5321       -depth <value>
5322              depth of the image
5323
5324       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
5325              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
5326
5327       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5328              specifies the X server to contact
5329
5330       -dispose <method>
5331              GIF disposal method
5332
5333       -dissolve <percent>
5334              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
5335
5336       -dither
5337              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
5338
5339       -encoding <type>
5340              specify the text encoding
5341
5342       -endian <type>
5343              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5344
5345       -filter <type>
5346              use this type of filter when resizing an image
5347
5348       -font <name>
5349              use this font when annotating the image with text
5350
5351       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
5352              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
5353
5354       -gravity <type>
5355              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
5356
5357       -green-primary <x>,<y>
5358              green chromaticity primary point
5359
5360       -help  print usage instructions
5361
5362       -interlace <type>
5363              the type of interlacing scheme
5364
5365       -label <name>
5366              assign a label to an image
5367
5368       -limit <type> <value>
5369              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
5370              resource limit
5371
5372       -log <string>
5373              Specify format for debug log
5374
5375       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5376
5377       -monitor
5378              show progress indication
5379
5380       -monochrome
5381              transform the image to black and white
5382
5383       -negate
5384              replace every pixel with its complementary color
5385
5386       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
5387              size and location of an image canvas
5388
5389       -profile <filename>
5390              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
5391
5392       -quality <value>
5393              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
5394
5395       -recolor <matrix>
5396              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
5397
5398       -red-primary <x>,<y>
5399              red chromaticity primary point
5400
5401       -render
5402              render vector operations
5403
5404       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
5405              Adjust image page offsets
5406
5407       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5408              resize an image
5409
5410       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
5411              rotate the image
5412
5413       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5414              chroma subsampling factors
5415
5416       -scene <value>
5417              set scene number
5418
5419       -set <attribute> <value>
5420              set an image attribute
5421
5422       +set <attribute>
5423              unset an image attribute
5424
5425       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
5426              sharpen the image
5427
5428       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5429              width and height of the image
5430
5431       -stegano <offset>
5432              hide watermark within an image
5433
5434       -stereo
5435              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
5436
5437       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
5438
5439       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5440              resize an image (quickly)
5441
5442       -treedepth <value>
5443              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
5444
5445       -trim  trim an image
5446
5447       -type <type>
5448              the image type
5449
5450       -units <type>
5451              the units of image resolution
5452
5453       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
5454              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
5455
5456       -verbose
5457              print detailed information about the image
5458
5459       -version
5460              print GraphicsMagick version string
5461
5462       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
5463              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
5464
5465       -white-point <x>,<y>
5466              chromaticity white point
5467
5468       -write <filename>
5469              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
5470
5471              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
5472              above.
5473
5474

GM CONJURE

5476       The  Magick  scripting language (MSL) will primarily benefit those that
5477       want to accomplish custom image processing tasks but  do  not  wish  to
5478       program,  or  those  that do not have access to a Perl interpreter or a
5479       compiler.  The interpreter is called conjure and  here  is  an  example
5480       script:
5481
5482           <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5483           <image size="400x400" >
5484             <read filename="image.gif" />
5485             <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5486             <resize geometry="%[dimensions]" />
5487             <get width="width" height="height" />
5488             <print output=
5489               "Image sized from %[base-width]x%[base-height]
5490                to %[width]x%[height].\n" />
5491             <write filename="image.png" />
5492           </image>
5493
5494
5495       invoked with
5496
5497           gm conjure -dimensions 400x400 incantation.msl
5498
5499
5500       All operations will closely follow the key/value pairs defined in Perl‐
5501       Magick, unless otherwise noted.
5502

OPTIONS

5504       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5505       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
5506       specifying the option again with  a  different  effect,  or  if  it  is
5507       changed by a statement in the scripting language.
5508
5509       You  can  define your own keyword/value pairs on the command line.  The
5510       script can then use this information when setting values  by  including
5511       %[keyword]  in  the  string.  For example, if you included "-dimensions
5512       400x400" on the command line, as illustrated  above,  then  any  string
5513       containing   "%[dimensions]"   would  have  400x400  substituted.   The
5514       "%[string]" can be  used  either  an  entire  string,  such  as  geome‐
5515       try="%[dimensions]"  or as a part of a string such as filename="%[base‐
5516       name].png".
5517
5518       The keyword can be any string except for the following reserved strings
5519       (in any upper, lower, or mixed case variant): debug, help, and verbose,
5520       whose usage is described below.
5521
5522       The value can be any string.  If either the keyword or the  value  con‐
5523       tains  white  space  or  any symbols that have special meanings to your
5524       shell such as "#", "|", or "%", enclose the string in  quotation  marks
5525       or use "\" to escape the white space and special symbols.
5526
5527       Keywords  and values are case dependent.  "Key", "key", and "KEY" would
5528       be three different keywords.
5529
5530       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5531
5532
5533       -debug <events>
5534              enable debug printout
5535
5536       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5537              add coder/decoder specific options
5538
5539       -help  print usage instructions
5540
5541       -log <string>
5542              Specify format for debug log
5543
5544       -verbose
5545              print detailed information about the image
5546
5547       -version
5548              print GraphicsMagick version string
5549

MAGICK SCRIPTING LANGUAGE

5551       The Magick Scripting Language (MSL)  presently  defines  the  following
5552       elements and their attributes:
5553
5554               <image>
5555
5556                    background, color, id, size
5557
5558                    Define  a new image object.  </image> destroys it. Because
5559                    of this, if you wish  to  reference  multiple  "subimages"
5560                    (aka  pages  or  layers),  you can embed one image element
5561                    inside of another. For example:
5562
5563
5564
5565                        <image>
5566                        <read filename="input.png" />
5567                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5568                        <image height="base-height" width="base-width">
5569                        <image />
5570                        <write filename="output.mng" />
5571                        </image>
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576                        <image size="400x400" />
5577
5578
5579               <group>
5580
5581
5582                    Define a new group of image objects.  By  default,  images
5583                    are only valid for the life of their <image>element.
5584
5585
5586
5587                        <image>   -- creates the image
5588                        .....     -- do stuff with it
5589                        </image>  -- dispose of the image
5590
5591
5592
5593                    However,  in  a  group, all images in that group will stay
5594                    around for the life of the group:
5595
5596
5597
5598                        <group>                           -- start a group
5599                            <image>                       -- create an image
5600                            ....                          -- do stuff
5601                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5602                            <image>                        --  create  another
5603                    image
5604                            ....                          -- do more stuff
5605                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5606                            <write filename="image.mng" />  -- output
5607                        </group>                           --  dispose of both
5608                    images
5609
5610
5611               <read>
5612
5613                        filename
5614
5615                    Read a new image from a disk file.
5616
5617
5618
5619                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5620
5621
5622
5623                    To read two images use
5624
5625
5626
5627                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5628                        <read filename="image.png />
5629
5630
5631               <write>
5632
5633                        filename
5634                    Write the image(s) to disk, either as a  single  multiple-
5635                    image file or multiple ones if necessary.
5636
5637
5638
5639                         <write filename=image.tiff" />
5640
5641               <get>
5642
5643                    Get   any  attribute  recognized  by  PerlMagick's  GetAt‐
5644                    tribute() and stores it as an image  attribute  for  later
5645                    use. Currently only width and height are supported.
5646
5647
5648                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5649                        <print  output="Image  size  is  %[base-width]x%[base-
5650                    height].\n" />
5651
5652
5653               <set>
5654
5655                    background, bordercolor, clip-mask,  colorspace,  density,
5656                    magick,  mattecolor, opacity.  Set an attribute recognized
5657                    by PerlMagick's GetAttribute().
5658               <profile>
5659
5660                        [profilename]
5661
5662                    Read one or more IPTC, ICC or generic profiles  from  file
5663                    and assign to image
5664
5665
5666
5667                        <profile iptc="profile.iptc" generic="generic.dat" />
5668
5669
5670
5671                    To remove a specified profile use "!" as the filename eg
5672
5673
5674
5675                        <profile icm="!" iptc="profile.iptc" />
5676
5677
5678               <border>
5679
5680                        fill, geometry, height, width
5681               <blur>
5682
5683                        radius, sigma
5684               <charcoal>
5685
5686                        radius, sigma
5687               <chop>
5688
5689                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5690               <crop>
5691
5692                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5693               <composite>
5694
5695                        compose, geometry, gravity, image, x, y
5696
5697
5698                        <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5699                        <group>
5700                            <image id="image_01">
5701                                <read filename="cloud3.gif"/>
5702                                <resize geometry="250x90"/>
5703                            </image>
5704                            <image id="image_02">
5705                                <read filename="cloud4.gif"/>
5706                                <resize geometry="190x100"/>
5707                            </image>
5708                            <image>
5709                                <read filename="background.jpg"/>
5710                                <composite       image="image_01"       geome‐
5711                    try="+740+470"/>
5712                                <composite       image="image_02"       geome‐
5713                    try="+390+415"/>
5714                            </image>
5715                            <write filename="result.png"/>
5716                        </group>
5717
5718
5719               <despeckle>
5720
5721               <emboss>
5722
5723                        radius, sigma
5724               <enhance>
5725
5726               <equalize>
5727
5728               <edge>
5729
5730                        radius
5731               <flip>
5732
5733               <flop>
5734
5735               <frame>
5736
5737                        fill, geometry, height, width, x, y, inner, outer
5738               <flatten>
5739
5740               <get>
5741
5742                        height, width
5743               <gamma>
5744
5745                        red, green, blue
5746               <image>
5747
5748                        background, color, id, size
5749               <implode>
5750
5751                        amount
5752               <magnify>
5753
5754               <minify>
5755
5756               <medianfilter>
5757
5758                        radius
5759               <normalize>
5760
5761               <oilpaint>
5762
5763                        radius
5764               <print>
5765
5766                        output
5767               <profile>
5768
5769                        [profilename]
5770               <read>
5771
5772               <resize>
5773
5774                        blur, filter, geometry, height, width
5775               <roll>
5776
5777                        geometry, x, y
5778               <rotate>
5779
5780                        degrees
5781               <reducenoise>
5782
5783                        radius
5784               <sample>
5785
5786                        geometry, height, width
5787               <scale>
5788
5789                        geometry, height, width
5790               <sharpen>
5791
5792                        radius, sigma
5793               <shave>
5794
5795                        geometry, height, width
5796               <shear>
5797
5798                        x, y
5799               <solarize>
5800
5801                        threshold
5802               <spread>
5803
5804                        radius
5805               <stegano>
5806
5807                        image
5808               <stereo>
5809
5810                        image
5811               <swirl>
5812
5813                        degrees
5814               <texture>
5815
5816                        image
5817               <threshold>
5818
5819                        threshold
5820               <transparent>
5821
5822                        color
5823               <trim>
5824
5825
5826

GM CONVERT

5828       Convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
5829       with a differing image format. In addition, various types of image pro‐
5830       cessing  can  be performed on the converted image during the conversion
5831       process. Convert recognizes the image formats  listed  in  GraphicsMag‐
5832       ick(1).
5833
5834

EXAMPLES

5836       To make a thumbnail of a JPEG image, use:
5837
5838           gm convert -size 120x120 cockatoo.jpg -resize 120x120
5839                   +profile "*" thumbnail.jpg
5840
5841
5842       In  this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder that
5843       the image is going to be downscaled to  120x120,  allowing  it  to  run
5844       faster  by  avoiding returning full-resolution images to GraphicsMagick
5845       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
5846       the  desired  dimensions of the output image.  It will be scaled so its
5847       largest dimension is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes  any  ICM,
5848       EXIF,  IPTC,  or  other profiles that might be present in the input and
5849       aren't needed in the thumbnail.
5850
5851       To convert a MIFF image of a cockatoo to a SUN raster image, use:
5852
5853           gm convert cockatoo.miff sun:cockatoo.ras
5854
5855
5856       To convert a multi-page PostScript document to  individual  FAX  pages,
5857       use:
5858
5859           gm convert -monochrome document.ps fax:page
5860
5861
5862       To  convert  a TIFF image to a PostScript A4 page with the image in the
5863       lower left-hand corner, use:
5864
5865           gm convert -page A4+0+0 image.tiff document.ps
5866
5867
5868       To convert a raw Gray image with  a  128  byte  header  to  a  portable
5869       graymap, use:
5870
5871           gm convert -depth 8 -size 768x512+128 gray:raw
5872                   image.pgm
5873
5874
5875       In  this example, "raw" is the input file.  Its format is "gray" and it
5876       has the dimensions and number of header bytes specified  by  the  -size
5877       option and the sample depth specified by the -depth option.  The output
5878       file is "image.pgm".  The suffix ".pgm" specifies its format.
5879
5880       To convert a Photo CD image to a TIFF image, use:
5881
5882           gm convert -size 1536x1024 img0009.pcd image.tiff
5883           gm convert img0009.pcd[4] image.tiff
5884
5885
5886       To create a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
5887
5888           gm convert 'vid:*.jpg' directory.miff
5889
5890
5891       To annotate an image with  blue  text  using  font  12x24  at  position
5892       (100,100), use:
5893
5894           gm convert -font helvetica -fill blue
5895                   -draw "text 100,100 Cockatoo"
5896                   bird.jpg bird.miff
5897
5898
5899       To tile a 640x480 image with a JPEG texture with bumps use:
5900
5901           gm convert -size 640x480 tile:bumps.jpg tiled.png
5902
5903
5904       To  surround  an  icon with an ornamental border to use with Mosaic(1),
5905       use:
5906
5907           gm convert -mattecolor "#697B8F" -frame 6x6 bird.jpg
5908                   icon.png
5909
5910
5911       To create a MNG animation from a DNA molecule sequence, use:
5912
5913           gm convert -delay 20 dna.* dna.mng
5914
5915

OPTIONS

5917       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5918       the  command line remains in effect for the set of images that follows,
5919       until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option  or  -noop.
5920       Some  options  only  affect  the decoding of images and others only the
5921       encoding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
5922
5923       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5924
5925
5926       -adjoin
5927              join images into a single multi-image file
5928
5929       -affine <matrix>
5930              drawing transform matrix
5931
5932       -antialias
5933              remove pixel aliasing
5934
5935       -append
5936              append a set of images
5937
5938        -asc-cdl <spec>
5939              apply ASC CDL color transform
5940
5941       -authenticate <string>
5942              decrypt image with this password
5943
5944       -auto-orient
5945              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
5946
5947       -average
5948              average a set of images
5949
5950       -background <color>
5951              the background color
5952
5953       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
5954              pixels below the threshold become black
5955
5956       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5957              blue chromaticity primary point
5958
5959       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
5960              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
5961
5962       -border <width>x<height>
5963              surround the image with a border of color
5964
5965       -bordercolor <color>
5966              the border color
5967
5968       -box <color>
5969              set the color of the annotation bounding box
5970
5971       -channel <type>
5972              the type of channel
5973
5974       -charcoal <factor>
5975              simulate a charcoal drawing
5976
5977       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
5978              remove pixels from the interior of an image
5979
5980       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
5981
5982       -coalesce
5983              merge a sequence of images
5984
5985       -colorize <value>
5986              colorize the image with the pen color
5987
5988       -colors <value>
5989              preferred number of colors in the image
5990
5991       -colorspace <value>
5992              the type of colorspace
5993
5994       -comment <string>
5995              annotate an image with a comment
5996
5997       -compose <operator>
5998              the type of image composition
5999
6000       -compress <type>
6001              the type of image compression
6002
6003       -contrast
6004              enhance or reduce the image contrast
6005
6006       -convolve <kernel>
6007              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
6008
6009       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6010              preferred size and location of the cropped image
6011
6012       -cycle <amount>
6013              displace image colormap by amount
6014
6015       -debug <events>
6016              enable debug printout
6017
6018       -deconstruct
6019              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
6020
6021       -define <key>{=<value>},...
6022              add coder/decoder specific options
6023
6024       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6025              display the next image after pausing
6026
6027       -density <width>x<height>
6028              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6029
6030       -depth <value>
6031              depth of the image
6032
6033       -despeckle
6034              reduce the speckles within an image
6035
6036       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6037              specifies the X server to contact
6038
6039       -dispose <method>
6040              GIF disposal method
6041
6042       -dither
6043              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6044
6045       -draw <string>
6046              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
6047
6048       -edge <radius>
6049              detect edges within an image
6050
6051       -emboss <radius>
6052              emboss an image
6053
6054       -encoding <type>
6055              specify the text encoding
6056
6057       -endian <type>
6058              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6059
6060       -enhance
6061              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6062
6063       -equalize
6064              perform histogram equalization to the image
6065
6066       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6067              composite image on background color canvas image
6068
6069       -fill <color>
6070              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
6071
6072       -filter <type>
6073              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6074
6075       -flatten
6076              flatten a sequence of images
6077
6078       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6079
6080       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6081
6082       -font <name>
6083              use this font when annotating the image with text
6084
6085       -format <string>
6086              output formatted image characteristics
6087
6088       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6089              surround the image with an ornamental border
6090
6091       -fuzz <distance>{%}
6092              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
6093
6094       -gamma <value>
6095              level of gamma correction
6096
6097       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
6098              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
6099
6100       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6101              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6102
6103       -gravity <type>
6104              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
6105
6106       -green-primary <x>,<y>
6107              green chromaticity primary point
6108
6109       -hald-clut <clut>
6110              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
6111
6112       -help  print usage instructions
6113
6114       -implode <factor>
6115              implode image pixels about the center
6116
6117       -intent <type>
6118              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
6119
6120       -interlace <type>
6121              the type of interlacing scheme
6122
6123       -label <name>
6124              assign a label to an image
6125
6126       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
6127              perform local adaptive thresholding
6128
6129       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
6130              adjust the level of image contrast
6131
6132       -limit <type> <value>
6133              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
6134              resource limit
6135
6136       -list <type>
6137              the type of list
6138
6139       -log <string>
6140              Specify format for debug log
6141
6142       -loop <iterations>
6143              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
6144
6145       -magnify
6146              magnify the image
6147
6148       -map <filename>
6149              choose a particular set of colors from this image
6150
6151       -mask <filename>
6152              Specify a clipping mask
6153
6154       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6155
6156       -mattecolor <color>
6157              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6158
6159       -median <radius>
6160              apply a median filter to the image
6161
6162       -minify <factor>
6163              minify the image
6164
6165       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
6166              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
6167
6168       -monitor
6169              show progress indication
6170
6171       -monochrome
6172              transform the image to black and white
6173
6174       -morph <frames>
6175              morphs an image sequence
6176
6177       -mosaic
6178              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
6179
6180       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
6181              Simulate motion blur
6182
6183       -negate
6184              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6185
6186       -noise <radius|type>
6187              add or reduce noise in an image
6188
6189       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6190
6191       -normalize
6192              transform image to span the full range of color values
6193
6194       -opaque <color>
6195              change this color to the pen color within the image
6196
6197       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
6198              apply  a  mathematical,  bitwise,  or value operator to an image
6199              channel
6200
6201       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
6202              ordered dither the image
6203
6204       -orient <orientation>
6205              Set the image orientation attribute
6206
6207       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6208              size and location of an image canvas
6209
6210       -paint <radius>
6211              simulate an oil painting
6212
6213       -pen <color>
6214              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
6215
6216       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
6217
6218       -pointsize <value>
6219              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
6220
6221       -preview <type>
6222              image preview type
6223
6224       -process <command>
6225              process a sequence of images using a process module
6226
6227       -profile <filename>
6228              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
6229
6230       -quality <value>
6231              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6232
6233       -raise <width>x<height>
6234              lighten or darken image edges
6235
6236       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
6237              random threshold the image
6238
6239       -recolor <matrix>
6240              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
6241
6242       -red-primary <x>,<y>
6243              red chromaticity primary point
6244
6245       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6246              apply options to a portion of the image
6247
6248       -render
6249              render vector operations
6250
6251       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
6252              Adjust image page offsets
6253
6254       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
6255              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
6256
6257       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6258              resize an image
6259
6260       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6261              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6262
6263       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6264              rotate the image
6265
6266       -sample <geometry>
6267              scale image using pixel sampling
6268
6269       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6270              chroma subsampling factors
6271
6272       -scale <geometry>
6273              scale the image.
6274
6275       -scene <value>
6276              set scene number
6277
6278       -set <attribute> <value>
6279              set an image attribute
6280
6281       +set <attribute>
6282              unset an image attribute
6283
6284       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6285              segment an image
6286
6287       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
6288              shade the image using a distant light source
6289
6290       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6291              sharpen the image
6292
6293       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
6294              shave pixels from the image edges
6295
6296       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
6297              shear the image along the X or Y axis
6298
6299       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6300              width and height of the image
6301
6302       -solarize <factor>
6303              negate all pixels above the threshold level
6304
6305       -spread <amount>
6306              displace image pixels by a random amount
6307
6308       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
6309
6310       -stroke <color>
6311              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
6312
6313       -strokewidth <value>
6314              set the stroke width
6315
6316       -swirl <degrees>
6317              swirl image pixels about the center
6318
6319       -texture <filename>
6320              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6321
6322       -threshold <value>{%}
6323              threshold the image
6324
6325       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6326              resize an image (quickly)
6327
6328       -tile <filename>
6329              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
6330
6331       -transform
6332              transform the image
6333
6334       -transparent <color>
6335              make this color transparent within the image
6336
6337       -treedepth <value>
6338              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6339
6340       -trim  trim an image
6341
6342       -type <type>
6343              the image type
6344
6345       -units <type>
6346              the units of image resolution
6347
6348       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
6349              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
6350
6351       -use-pixmap
6352              use the pixmap
6353
6354       -verbose
6355              print detailed information about the image
6356
6357       -version
6358              print GraphicsMagick version string
6359
6360       -view <string>
6361              FlashPix viewing parameters
6362
6363       -virtual-pixel <method>
6364              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
6365
6366       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
6367              alter an image along a sine wave
6368
6369       -white-point <x>,<y>
6370              chromaticity white point
6371
6372       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
6373              pixels above the threshold become white
6374
6375       -write <filename>
6376              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
6377
6378              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
6379              above.
6380

GM DISPLAY

6382       Display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
6383       play program. It can display an image on any workstation screen running
6384       an  X server. Display can read and write many of the more popular image
6385       formats (e.g. JPEG, TIFF, PNM, Photo CD, etc.).
6386
6387       With display, you can perform these functions on an image:
6388
6389                o  load an image from a file
6390                o  display the next image
6391                o  display the former image
6392                o  display a sequence of images as a slide show
6393                o  write the image to a file
6394                o  print the image to a PostScript printer
6395                o  delete the image file
6396                o  create a Visual Image Directory
6397                o  select the image to display by its  thumbnail  rather  than
6398               name
6399                o  undo last image transformation
6400                o  copy a region of the image
6401                o  paste a region to the image
6402                o  restore the image to its original size
6403                o  refresh the image
6404                o  half the image size
6405                o  double the image size
6406                o  resize the image
6407                o  crop the image
6408                o  cut the image
6409                o  flop image in the horizontal direction
6410                o  flip image in the vertical direction
6411                o  rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise
6412                o  rotate the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise
6413                o  rotate the image
6414                o  shear the image
6415                o  roll the image
6416                o  trim the image edges
6417                o  invert the colors of the image
6418                o  vary the color brightness
6419                o  vary the color saturation
6420                o  vary the image hue
6421                o  gamma correct the image
6422                o  sharpen the image contrast
6423                o  dull the image contrast
6424                o  perform histogram equalization on the image
6425                o  perform histogram normalization on the image
6426                o  negate the image colors
6427                o  convert the image to grayscale
6428                o  set the maximum number of unique colors in the image
6429                o  reduce the speckles within an image
6430                o  eliminate peak noise from an image
6431                o  detect edges within the image
6432                o  emboss an image
6433                o  segment the image by color
6434                o  simulate an oil painting
6435                o  simulate a charcoal drawing
6436                o  annotate the image with text
6437                o  draw on the image
6438                o  edit an image pixel color
6439                o  edit the image matte information
6440                o  composite an image with another
6441                o  add a border to the image
6442                o  surround image with an ornamental border
6443                o  apply image processing techniques to a region of interest
6444                o  display information about the image
6445                o  zoom a portion of the image
6446                o  show a histogram of the image
6447                o  display image to background of a window
6448                o  set user preferences
6449                o  display information about this program
6450                o  discard all images and exit program
6451                o  change the level of magnification
6452                o   display images specified by a World Wide Web (WWW) uniform
6453               resource locator (URL)
6454
6455

EXAMPLES

6457       To scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and  480
6458       pixels in height and position the window at location (200,200), use:
6459
6460           gm display -geometry 640x480+200+200! cockatoo.miff
6461
6462
6463       To  display an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a back‐
6464       drop, use:
6465
6466           gm display +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.miff
6467
6468
6469       To tile a slate texture onto the root window, use:
6470
6471           gm display -size 1280x1024 -window root slate.png
6472
6473
6474       To display a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
6475
6476           gm display 'vid:*.jpg'
6477
6478
6479       To display a MAP image that is 640 pixels in width and  480  pixels  in
6480       height with 256 colors, use:
6481
6482           gm display -size 640x480+256 cockatoo.map
6483
6484
6485       To display an image of a cockatoo specified with a World Wide Web (WWW)
6486       uniform resource locator (URL), use:
6487
6488           gm display ftp://wizards.dupont.com/images/cockatoo.jpg
6489
6490
6491       To display histogram of an image, use:
6492
6493           gm gm convert file.jpg HISTOGRAM:- | gm display -
6494
6495

OPTIONS

6497       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
6498       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
6499       specifying the option again with a different  effect.  For  example  to
6500       display  three  images,  the  first  with 32 colors, the second with an
6501       unlimited number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
6502
6503           gm display -colors 32 cockatoo.miff -noop duck.miff
6504                        -colors 16 macaw.miff
6505
6506
6507       Display options can appear on the command line or in your  X  resources
6508       file.  See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values specified
6509       in your X resources file.
6510
6511       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
6512
6513
6514       -authenticate <string>
6515              decrypt image with this password
6516
6517       -backdrop
6518              display the image centered on a backdrop.
6519
6520       -background <color>
6521              the background color
6522
6523       -border <width>x<height>
6524              surround the image with a border of color
6525
6526       -bordercolor <color>
6527              the border color
6528
6529       -borderwidth <geometry>
6530              the border width
6531
6532       -colormap <type>
6533              define the colormap type
6534
6535       -colors <value>
6536              preferred number of colors in the image
6537
6538       -colorspace <value>
6539              the type of colorspace
6540
6541       -comment <string>
6542              annotate an image with a comment
6543
6544       -compress <type>
6545              the type of image compression
6546
6547       -contrast
6548              enhance or reduce the image contrast
6549
6550       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6551              preferred size and location of the cropped image
6552
6553       -debug <events>
6554              enable debug printout
6555
6556       -define <key>{=<value>},...
6557              add coder/decoder specific options
6558
6559       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6560              display the next image after pausing
6561
6562       -density <width>x<height>
6563              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6564
6565       -depth <value>
6566              depth of the image
6567
6568       -despeckle
6569              reduce the speckles within an image
6570
6571       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6572              specifies the X server to contact
6573
6574       -dispose <method>
6575              GIF disposal method
6576
6577       -dither
6578              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6579
6580       -edge <radius>
6581              detect edges within an image
6582
6583       -endian <type>
6584              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6585
6586       -enhance
6587              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6588
6589       -filter <type>
6590              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6591
6592       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6593
6594       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6595
6596       -font <name>
6597              use this font when annotating the image with text
6598
6599       -foreground <color>
6600              define the foreground color
6601
6602       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6603              surround the image with an ornamental border
6604
6605       -gamma <value>
6606              level of gamma correction
6607
6608       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6609              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6610
6611       -help  print usage instructions
6612
6613       -iconGeometry <geometry>
6614              specify the icon geometry
6615
6616       -iconic
6617              iconic animation
6618
6619       -immutable
6620              make image immutable
6621
6622       -interlace <type>
6623              the type of interlacing scheme
6624
6625       -label <name>
6626              assign a label to an image
6627
6628       -limit <type> <value>
6629              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
6630              resource limit
6631
6632       -log <string>
6633              Specify format for debug log
6634
6635       -magnify <factor>
6636              magnify the image
6637
6638       -map <type>
6639              display image using this type.
6640
6641       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6642
6643       -mattecolor <color>
6644              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6645
6646       -monitor
6647              show progress indication
6648
6649       -monochrome
6650              transform the image to black and white
6651
6652       -name  name an image
6653
6654       -negate
6655              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6656
6657       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6658
6659       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6660              size and location of an image canvas
6661
6662       +progress
6663              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
6664
6665       -quality <value>
6666              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6667
6668       -raise <width>x<height>
6669              lighten or darken image edges
6670
6671       -remote
6672              perform a X11 remote operation
6673
6674       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6675              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6676
6677       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6678              rotate the image
6679
6680       -sample <geometry>
6681              scale image using pixel sampling
6682
6683       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6684              chroma subsampling factors
6685
6686       -scenes <value-value>
6687              range of image scene numbers to read
6688
6689       -set <attribute> <value>
6690              set an image attribute
6691
6692       +set <attribute>
6693              unset an image attribute
6694
6695       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6696              segment an image
6697
6698       -shared-memory
6699              use shared memory
6700
6701       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6702              sharpen the image
6703
6704       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6705              width and height of the image
6706
6707       -text-font <name>
6708              font for writing fixed-width text
6709
6710       -texture <filename>
6711              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6712
6713       -title <string>
6714              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
6715
6716       -treedepth <value>
6717              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6718
6719       -trim  trim an image
6720
6721       -type <type>
6722              the image type
6723
6724       -update <seconds>
6725               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
6726
6727       -use-pixmap
6728              use the pixmap
6729
6730       -verbose
6731              print detailed information about the image
6732
6733       -version
6734              print GraphicsMagick version string
6735
6736       -visual <type>
6737              animate images using this X visual type
6738
6739       -window <id>
6740              make image the background of a window
6741
6742       -window-group
6743              specify the window group
6744
6745       -write <filename>
6746              write the image to a file [display]
6747
6748              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
6749              above.
6750
6751

MOUSE BUTTONS

6753       The effects of each button press is described below. Three buttons  are
6754       required.  If you have a two button mouse, button 1 and 3 are returned.
6755       Press ALT and button 3 to simulate button 2.
6756
6757       1       Press this button to map or unmap the Command widget . See  the
6758              next section for more information about the Command widget.
6759
6760       2       Press and drag to define a region of the image to magnify.
6761
6762       3        Press  and drag to choose from a select set of display(1) com‐
6763              mands. This button behaves differently if the image  being  dis‐
6764              played  is a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of
6765              the directory and press this button and drag to select a command
6766              from a pop-up menu.  Choose from these menu items:
6767
6768                  Open
6769                  Next
6770                  Former
6771                  Delete
6772                  Update
6773
6774
6775              If  you  choose  Open, the image represented by the tile is dis‐
6776              played.  To return to the visual image  directory,  choose  Next
6777              from  the  Command  widget  (refer to Command Widget).  Next and
6778              Former moves to the next or former  image  respectively.  Choose
6779              Delete to delete a particular image tile. Finally, choose Update
6780              to synchronize all the image tiles with their respective images.
6781              See montage and miff for more details.
6782

COMMAND WIDGET

6784       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
6785
6786           File
6787
6788           Open...
6789           Next
6790           Former
6791           Select...
6792           Save...
6793           Print...
6794           Delete...
6795           Canvas...
6796           Visual Directory...
6797           Quit
6798
6799
6800
6801           Edit
6802
6803           Undo
6804           Redo
6805           Cut
6806           Copy
6807           Paste
6808
6809
6810
6811           View
6812
6813           Half Size
6814           Original Size
6815           Double Size
6816           Resize...
6817           Apply
6818           Refresh
6819           Restore
6820
6821
6822
6823           Transform
6824
6825           Crop
6826           Chop
6827           Flop
6828           Flip
6829           Rotate Right
6830           Rotate Left
6831           Rotate...
6832           Shear...
6833           Roll...
6834           Trim Edges
6835
6836
6837
6838           Enhance
6839
6840           Hue...
6841           Saturation...
6842           Brightness...
6843           Gamma...
6844           Spiff...
6845           Dull
6846           Equalize
6847           Normalize
6848           Negate
6849           GRAYscale
6850           Quantize...
6851
6852
6853
6854           Effects
6855
6856           Despeckle
6857           Emboss
6858           Reduce Noise
6859           Add Noise
6860           Sharpen...
6861           Blur...
6862           Threshold...
6863           Edge Detect...
6864           Spread...
6865           Shade...
6866           Raise...
6867           Segment...
6868
6869
6870
6871           F/X
6872
6873           Solarize...
6874           Swirl...
6875           Implode...
6876           Wave...
6877           Oil Paint...
6878           Charcoal Draw...
6879
6880
6881
6882           Image Edit
6883
6884           Annotate...
6885           Draw...
6886           Color...
6887           Matte...
6888           Composite...
6889           Add Border...
6890           Add Frame...
6891           Comment...
6892           Launch...
6893           Region of Interest...
6894
6895
6896
6897           Miscellany
6898
6899           Image Info
6900           Zoom Image
6901           Show Preview...
6902           Show Histogram
6903           Show Matte
6904           Background...
6905           Slide Show
6906           Preferences...
6907
6908
6909
6910           Help
6911
6912           Overview
6913           Browse Documentation
6914           About Display
6915
6916
6917
6918       Menu  items  with  a indented triangle have a sub-menu. They are repre‐
6919       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
6920       pointer  to  the appropriate menu and press button 1 and drag. When you
6921       find the desired sub-menu item, release the button and the  command  is
6922       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
6923       execute a particular command.
6924

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

6926       Accelerators are one or two key presses that effect a  particular  com‐
6927       mand.  The keyboard accelerators that display understands is:
6928
6929           Ctl+O     Press to load an image from a file.
6930           space     Press to display the next image.
6931
6932
6933       If  the  image is a multi-paged document such as a PostScript document,
6934       you can skip ahead several pages by preceding this command with a  num‐
6935       ber.   For  example to display the fourth page beyond the current page,
6936       press 4space.
6937
6938           backspace Press to display the former image.
6939
6940
6941       If the image is a multi-paged document such as a  PostScript  document,
6942       you can skip behind several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6943       ber.  For example to display the  fourth  page  preceding  the  current
6944       page, press 4n.
6945
6946           Ctl-S    Press to save the image to a file.
6947           Ctl-P    Press to print the image to a
6948                    PostScript printer.
6949           Ctl-D    Press to delete an image file.
6950           Ctl-N    Press to create a blank canvas.
6951           Ctl-Q    Press to discard all images and exit program.
6952           Ctl+Z    Press to undo last image transformation.
6953           Ctl+R    Press to redo last image transformation.
6954           Ctl-X    Press to cut a region of
6955                    the image.
6956           Ctl-C    Press to copy a region of
6957                    the image.
6958           Ctl-V    Press to paste a region to
6959                    the image.
6960           <        Press to halve the image size.
6961           .        Press to return to the original image size.
6962           >        Press to double the image size.
6963           %        Press to resize the image to a width and height
6964                    you specify.
6965           Cmd-A    Press to make any image transformations
6966                    permanent.
6967                    By default, any image size transformations are
6968                    applied to the original image to create the
6969                    image displayed on the X server.  However, the
6970                    transformations are not permanent (i.e. the
6971                    original image does not change size only the
6972                    X image does). For example, if you press ">"
6973                    the X image will appear to double in size, but
6974                    the original image will in fact remain the same
6975                    size.  To force the original image to double in
6976                    size, press ">" followed by "Cmd-A".
6977           @        Press to refresh the image window.
6978           C        Press to crop the image.
6979           [        Press to chop the image.
6980           H        Press to flop image in the horizontal direction.
6981           V        Press to flip image in the vertical direction.
6982           /        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
6983           \        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees
6984                    counter-clockwise.
6985           *        Press to rotate the image
6986                    the number of degrees you specify.
6987           S        Press to shear the image the number of degrees
6988                    you specify.
6989           R        Press to roll the image.
6990           T        Press to trim the image edges.
6991           Shft-H   Press to vary the color hue.
6992           Shft-S   Press to vary the color saturation.
6993           Shft-L   Press to vary the image brightness.
6994           Shft-G   Press to gamma correct the image.
6995           Shft-C   Press to spiff up the image contrast.
6996           Shft-Z   Press to dull the image contrast.
6997           =        Press to perform histogram equalization on
6998                    the image.
6999           Shft-N   Press to perform histogram normalization on
7000                    the image.
7001           Shft-~   Press to negate the colors of the image.
7002           .        Press to convert the image colors to gray.
7003           Shft-#   Press to set the maximum number of unique
7004                    colors in the image.
7005           F2       Press to reduce the speckles in an image.
7006           F2       Press to emboss an image.
7007           F4       Press to eliminate peak noise from an image.
7008           F5       Press to add noise to an image.
7009           F6       Press to sharpen an image.
7010           F7       Press to blur image an image.
7011           F8       Press to threshold the image.
7012           F9       Press to detect edges within an image.
7013           F10      Press to displace pixels by a random amount.
7014           F11      Press to shade the image using a distant light
7015                    source.
7016           F12      Press to lighten or darken image edges to
7017                    create a 3-D effect.
7018           F13      Press to segment the image by color.
7019           Meta-S   Press to swirl image pixels about the center.
7020           Meta-I   Press to implode image pixels about the center.
7021           Meta-W   Press to alter an image along a sine wave.
7022           Meta-P   Press to simulate an oil painting.
7023           Meta-C   Press to simulate a charcoal drawing.
7024           Alt-X    Press to composite the image
7025                    with another.
7026           Alt-A    Press to annotate the image with text.
7027           Alt-D    Press to draw a line on the image.
7028           Alt-P    Press to edit an image pixel color.
7029           Alt-M    Press to edit the image matte information.
7030           Alt-X    Press to composite the image with another.
7031           Alt-A    Press to add a border to the image.
7032           Alt-F    Press to add a ornamental frame to the image.
7033           Alt-Shft-!   Press to add an image comment.
7034           Ctl-A    Press to apply image processing techniques to a
7035                    region of interest.
7036           Shft-?   Press to display information about the image.
7037           Shft-+   Press to map the zoom image window.
7038           Shft-P   Press to preview an image enhancement, effect,
7039                    or f/x.
7040           F1       Press to display helpful information about
7041                    the "display" utility.
7042           Find     Press to browse documentation about
7043                    GraphicsMagick.
7044           1-9      Press to change the level of magnification.
7045
7046
7047       Use the arrow keys to move the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
7048       within the magnify window. Be sure to first map the magnify  window  by
7049       pressing button 2.
7050
7051       Press ALT and one of the arrow keys to trim off one pixel from any side
7052       of the image.
7053

X RESOURCES

7055       Display options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resource
7056       file.  Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
7057       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
7058
7059       Most display options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, dis‐
7060       play uses the following X resources:
7061
7062       background (class Background)
7063               Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window back‐
7064              ground. The default is #ccc.
7065
7066       borderColor (class BorderColor)
7067               Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window  bor‐
7068              der. The default is #ccc.
7069
7070       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
7071                Specifies  the width in pixels of the image window border. The
7072              default is 2.
7073
7074       browseCommand (class browseCommand)
7075               Specifies the name of the  preferred  browser  when  displaying
7076              GraphicsMagick documentation. The default is netscape %s.
7077
7078       confirmExit (class ConfirmExit)
7079                Display  pops  up  a dialog box to confirm exiting the program
7080              when exiting the program. Set this resource  to  False  to  exit
7081              without a confirmation.
7082
7083       displayGamma (class DisplayGamma)
7084                Specifies  the  gamma of the X server.  You can apply separate
7085              gamma values to the red, green, and blue channels of  the  image
7086              with   a   gamma   value  list  delineated  with  slashes  (i.e.
7087              1.7/2.3/1.2).  The default is 2.2.
7088
7089       displayWarnings (class DisplayWarnings)
7090               Display pops up a dialog box whenever a warning message occurs.
7091              Set this resource to False to ignore warning messages.
7092
7093       font (class FontList)
7094                Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in normal for‐
7095              matted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
7096
7097       font[1-9] (class Font[1-9])
7098               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when annotating
7099              the  image  window with text. The default fonts are fixed, vari‐
7100              able, 5x8, 6x10, 7x13bold, 8x13bold, 9x15bold, 10x20, and 12x24.
7101
7102       foreground (class Foreground)
7103               Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the  image
7104              window.  The default is black.
7105
7106       gammaCorrect (class gammaCorrect)
7107                This  resource,  if  true,  will lighten or darken an image of
7108              known gamma to match the gamma of the display (see resource dis‐
7109              playGamma). The default is True.
7110
7111       geometry (class Geometry)
7112                Specifies the preferred size and position of the image window.
7113              It is not necessarily obeyed by all window managers.
7114
7115              Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style.   A  negative  x
7116              offset  is  measured  from  the  right edge of the screen to the
7117              right edge of the icon, and a negative y offset is measured from
7118              the bottom edge of the screen to the bottom edge of the icon.
7119
7120       iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
7121                Specifies  the  preferred size and position of the application
7122              when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
7123              agers.
7124
7125              Offsets,  if present, are handled in the same manner as in class
7126              Geometry.
7127
7128       iconic (class Iconic)
7129               This resource indicates that you would prefer that the applica‐
7130              tion's windows initially not be visible as if the windows had be
7131              immediately iconified by you. Window managers may choose not  to
7132              honor the application's request.
7133
7134       magnify (class Magnify)
7135                specifies  an  integral  factor  by  which the image should be
7136              enlarged. The default is 3.  This value only affects the  magni‐
7137              fication  window which is invoked with button number 3 after the
7138              image is displayed.
7139
7140       matteColor (class MatteColor)
7141               Specify the color of windows. It is used for the backgrounds of
7142              windows,  menus,  and  notices. A 3D effect is achieved by using
7143              highlight and shadow colors derived  from  this  color.  Default
7144              value: #697B8F.
7145
7146       name (class Name)
7147                This resource specifies the name under which resources for the
7148              application should be found. This resource is  useful  in  shell
7149              aliases  to  distinguish  between invocations of an application,
7150              without resorting to creating links to alter the executable file
7151              name. The default is the application name.
7152
7153       pen[1-9] (class Pen[1-9])
7154                Specifies the color of the preferred font to use when annotat‐
7155              ing the image window with text. The default  colors  are  black,
7156              blue, green, cyan, gray, red, magenta, yellow, and white.
7157
7158       printCommand (class PrintCommand)
7159               This command is executed whenever Print is issued.  In general,
7160              it is the command to print PostScript to your  printer.  Default
7161              value: lp -c -s %i.
7162
7163       sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
7164                This  resource  specifies  whether  display should attempt use
7165              shared memory for pixmaps. GraphicsMagick must be compiled  with
7166              shared  memory support, and the display must support the MIT-SHM
7167              extension. Otherwise, this resource is ignored. The  default  is
7168              True.
7169
7170       textFont (class textFont)
7171               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
7172              writer style) formatted text. The default is 14 point Courier.
7173
7174       title (class Title)
7175               This resource specifies the title to be used for the image win‐
7176              dow.  This  information is sometimes used by a window manager to
7177              provide a header identifying the  window.  The  default  is  the
7178              image file name.
7179
7180       undoCache (class UndoCache)
7181               Specifies, in mega-bytes, the amount of memory in the undo edit
7182              cache.  Each time you modify the image it is saved in  the  undo
7183              edit  cache as long as memory is available. You can subsequently
7184              undo one or more of these transformations.  The  default  is  16
7185              Megabytes.
7186
7187       usePixmap (class UsePixmap)
7188               Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this resource
7189              to True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This option is  use‐
7190              ful  if  your image exceeds the dimensions of your server screen
7191              and you intend to pan the image. Panning  is  much  faster  with
7192              Pixmaps  than  with  a XImage. Pixmaps are considered a precious
7193              resource, use them with discretion.
7194
7195              To set the geometry of the Magnify or Pan  or  window,  use  the
7196              geometry  resource.  For example, to set the Pan window geometry
7197              to 256x256, use:
7198
7199                  gm display.pan.geometry: 256x256
7200
7201

IMAGE LOADING

7203       To select an image to display, choose Open of the  File  sub-menu  from
7204       the  Command widget. A file browser is displayed.  To choose a particu‐
7205       lar image file, move the pointer to the filename and press any  button.
7206       The  filename  is  copied to the text window. Next, press Open or press
7207       the RETURN key.  Alternatively,  you  can  type  the  image  file  name
7208       directly  into the text window. To descend directories, choose a direc‐
7209       tory name and press the button twice  quickly.  A  scrollbar  allows  a
7210       large  list  of  filenames  to  be moved through the viewing area if it
7211       exceeds the size of the list area.
7212
7213       You can trim the list of file names by using shell globbing characters.
7214       For example, type *.jpg to list only files that end with .jpg.
7215
7216       To  select  your image from the X server screen instead of from a file,
7217       Choose Grab of the Open widget.
7218

VISUAL IMAGE DIRECTORY

7220       To create a Visual Image Directory, choose Visual Directory of the File
7221       sub-menu from the Command widget . A file browser is displayed. To cre‐
7222       ate a Visual Image Directory from all the images in the current  direc‐
7223       tory,  press Directory or press the RETURN key.  Alternatively, you can
7224       select a set of image names by using  shell  globbing  characters.  For
7225       example,  type  *.jpg  to  include  only  files  that end with .jpg. To
7226       descend directories, choose a directory name and press the button twice
7227       quickly.  A  scrollbar  allows  a  large  list of filenames to be moved
7228       through the viewing area if it exceeds the size of the list area.
7229
7230       After you select a set of files, they are turned  into  thumbnails  and
7231       tiled  onto a single image. Now move the pointer to a particular thumb‐
7232       nail and press button 3 and drag. Finally, select Open. The image  rep‐
7233       resented  by  the  thumbnail is displayed at its full size. Choose Next
7234       from the File sub-menu of the Command widget to return  to  the  Visual
7235       Image Directory.
7236

IMAGE CUTTING

7238       Note  that  cut  information  for image window is not retained for col‐
7239       ormapped X server visuals (e.g.  StaticColor,  StaticColor,  GRAYScale,
7240       PseudoColor).   Correct  cutting  behavior  may  require a TrueColor or
7241       DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7242
7243       To begin, press choose Cut of the Edit sub-menu from the  Command  wid‐
7244       get. Alternatively, press F3 in the image window.
7245
7246       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7247       window. You are now in cut mode. In cut mode, the  Command  widget  has
7248       these options:
7249
7250           Help
7251           Dismiss
7252
7253
7254       To  define  a  cut  region,  press button 1 and drag. The cut region is
7255       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7256       lows  the  pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cut region, release
7257       the button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the  Command
7258       widget has these options:
7259
7260           Cut
7261           Help
7262           Dismiss
7263
7264
7265       You  can  make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cut rec‐
7266       tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Cut  to
7267       commit  your copy region. To exit without cutting the image, press Dis‐
7268       miss.
7269

IMAGE COPYING

7271       To begin, press choose Copy of the Edit sub-menu from the Command  wid‐
7272       get. Alternatively, press F4 in the image window.
7273
7274       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7275       window. You are now in copy mode. In copy mode, the Command widget  has
7276       these options:
7277
7278           Help
7279           Dismiss
7280
7281
7282       To  define  a  copy region, press button 1 and drag. The copy region is
7283       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7284       lows  the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the copy region, release
7285       the button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the  Command
7286       widget has these options:
7287
7288           Copy
7289           Help
7290           Dismiss
7291
7292
7293       You  can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the copy rec‐
7294       tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Copy to
7295       commit  your copy region. To exit without copying the image, press Dis‐
7296       miss.
7297

IMAGE PASTING

7299       To begin, press choose Paste of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7300       get. Alternatively, press F5 in the image window.
7301
7302       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7303       window. You are now in Paste mode. To exit immediately, press  Dismiss.
7304       In Paste mode, the Command widget has these options:
7305
7306           Operators
7307
7308           over
7309           in
7310           out
7311           atop
7312           xor
7313           plus
7314           minus
7315           add
7316           subtract
7317           difference
7318           multiply
7319           bumpmap
7320           replace
7321
7322           Help
7323           Dismiss
7324
7325
7326       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7327       widget. How each operator behaves is described below. image  window  is
7328       the  image  currently displayed on your X server and image is the image
7329       obtained with the File Browser widget.
7330
7331       over    The result is the union of the two  image  shapes,  with  image
7332              obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7333
7334       in       The  result  is simply image cut by the shape of image window.
7335              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7336
7337       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7338              out.
7339
7340       atop     The  result  is  the  same  shape  as image window, with image
7341              obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7342              differs  from  over  because  the portion of image outside image
7343              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7344
7345       xor     The result is the image data from both image and  image  window
7346              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7347
7348       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7349              cropped to the maximum value (no overflow).  This  operation  is
7350              independent of the matte channels.
7351
7352       minus    The  result of image - image window, with underflow cropped to
7353              zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to opaque,  full  cover‐
7354              age).
7355
7356       add      The  result  of  image  + image window, with overflow wrapping
7357              around (mod MaxRGB+1).
7358
7359       subtract
7360               The result of image - image  window,  with  underflow  wrapping
7361              around  (mod  MaxRGB+1).  The  add and subtract operators can be
7362              used to perform reversible transformations.
7363
7364       difference
7365               The result of abs(image - image window).  This  is  useful  for
7366              comparing two very similar images.
7367
7368       multiply
7369               The result of image * image window. This is useful for the cre‐
7370              ation of drop-shadows.
7371
7372       bumpmap
7373               The result of image window shaded by window.
7374
7375       replace
7376              The resulting image is image window replaced with  image.   Here
7377              the matte information is ignored.
7378
7379              The  image  compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel in the
7380              image for some operations. This extra channel usually defines  a
7381              mask  which  represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image.
7382              This is the case when matte is 255 (full  coverage)  for  pixels
7383              inside  the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on the
7384              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7385              ized  with  0  for any pixel matching in color to pixel location
7386              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7387              a matte channel.
7388
7389              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7390              colormapped X server  visuals  (e.g.  StaticColor,  StaticColor,
7391              GrayScale,   PseudoColor).   Correct  compositing  behavior  may
7392              require a TrueColor or DirectColor visual  or  a  Standard  Col‐
7393              ormap.
7394
7395              Choosing  a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7396              is replace.  However, you must choose a  location  to  composite
7397              your  image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7398              releasing and an outline of the image will appear  to  help  you
7399              identify your location.
7400
7401              The  actual  colors  of  the pasted image is saved. However, the
7402              color that appears in image window may be different.  For  exam‐
7403              ple,  on  a  monochrome screen image window will appear black or
7404              white even though your pasted image may have many colors. If the
7405              image  is saved to a file it is written with the correct colors.
7406              To assure the correct colors are saved in the final  image,  any
7407              PseudoClass  image is promoted to DirectClass.  To force a Pseu‐
7408              doClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7409

IMAGE CROPPING

7411       To begin, press choose Crop of the Transform submenu from  the  Command
7412       widget. Alternatively, press C in the image window.
7413
7414       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7415       window. You are now in crop mode. In crop mode, the Command widget  has
7416       these options:
7417
7418           Help
7419           Dismiss
7420
7421
7422       To  define  a  cropping  region,  press button 1 and drag. The cropping
7423       region is defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or  contracts
7424       as  it  follows  the  pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cropping
7425       region, release the button. You are now in  rectify  mode.  In  rectify
7426       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7427
7428           Crop
7429           Help
7430           Dismiss
7431
7432
7433       You  can  make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cropping
7434       rectangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Crop
7435       to  commit  your  cropping  region. To exit without cropping the image,
7436       press Dismiss.
7437

IMAGE CHOPPING

7439       An image is chopped interactively. There is no command line argument to
7440       chop an image. To begin, choose Chop of the Transform sub-menu from the
7441       Command widget. Alternatively, press [ in the Image window.
7442
7443       You are now in Chop mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.  In  Chop
7444       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7445
7446           Direction
7447
7448           horizontal
7449           vertical
7450
7451           Help
7452           Dismiss
7453
7454
7455       If  the  you choose the horizontal direction (this is the default), the
7456       area of the image between the two horizontal endpoints of the chop line
7457       is  removed.  Otherwise, the area of the image between the two vertical
7458       endpoints of the chop line is removed.
7459
7460       Select a location within the image window to begin your chop, press and
7461       hold  any  button.  Next,  move  the pointer to another location in the
7462       image.  As you move a line will connect the initial  location  and  the
7463       pointer. When you release the button, the area within the image to chop
7464       is determined by which direction you choose from the Command widget.
7465
7466       To cancel the image chopping, move the pointer  back  to  the  starting
7467       point of the line and release the button.
7468

IMAGE ROTATION

7470       Press  the  /  key  to  rotate  the image 90 degrees or \ to rotate -90
7471       degrees.  To  interactively  choose  the  degree  of  rotation,  choose
7472       Rotate...   of the Transform submenu from the Command Widget.  Alterna‐
7473       tively, press * in the image window.
7474
7475       A small horizontal line is drawn next to the pointer. You  are  now  in
7476       rotate  mode.  To  exit immediately, press Dismiss. In rotate mode, the
7477       Command widget has these options:
7478
7479           Pixel Color
7480
7481           black
7482           blue
7483           cyan
7484           green
7485           gray
7486           red
7487           magenta
7488           yellow
7489           white
7490           Browser...
7491
7492           Direction
7493
7494           horizontal
7495           vertical
7496
7497           Help
7498           Dismiss
7499
7500
7501       Choose a background color from the  Pixel  Color  sub-menu.  Additional
7502       background  colors  can  be  specified  with the color browser. You can
7503       change the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7504
7505       If you choose the color browser and press  Grab,  you  can  select  the
7506       background  color  by  moving  the  pointer to the desired color on the
7507       screen and press any button.
7508
7509       Choose a point in the image window and  press  this  button  and  hold.
7510       Next,  move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move a
7511       line connects the initial location and the pointer.  When  you  release
7512       the  button, the degree of image rotation is determined by the slope of
7513       the line you just drew. The slope is  relative  to  the  direction  you
7514       choose from the Direction sub-menu of the Command widget.
7515
7516       To  cancel  the  image  rotation, move the pointer back to the starting
7517       point of the line and release the button.
7518

IMAGE ANNOTATION

7520       An image is annotated interactively. There is no command line  argument
7521       to  annotate an image. To begin, choose Annotate of the Image Edit sub-
7522       menu from the Command widget. Alternatively, press a in the image  win‐
7523       dow.
7524
7525       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7526       window. You are now in annotate mode. To exit immediately,  press  Dis‐
7527       miss.  In annotate mode, the Command widget has these options:
7528
7529
7530       Font Name
7531
7532
7533       fixed
7534
7535       variable
7536
7537       5x8
7538
7539       6x10
7540
7541       7x13bold
7542
7543       8x13bold
7544
7545       9x15bold
7546
7547       10x20
7548
7549       12x24
7550
7551       Browser...
7552
7553
7554       Font Color
7555
7556
7557       black
7558
7559       blue
7560
7561       cyan
7562
7563       green
7564
7565       gray
7566
7567       red
7568
7569       magenta
7570
7571       yellow
7572
7573       white
7574
7575       transparent
7576
7577       Browser...
7578
7579
7580       Box Color
7581
7582
7583       black
7584
7585       blue
7586
7587       cyan
7588
7589       green
7590
7591       gray
7592
7593       red
7594
7595       magenta
7596
7597       yellow
7598
7599       white
7600
7601       transparent
7602
7603       Browser...
7604
7605
7606       Rotate Text
7607
7608
7609       -90
7610
7611       -45
7612
7613       -30
7614
7615       0
7616
7617       30
7618
7619       45
7620
7621       90
7622
7623       180
7624
7625       Dialog...
7626
7627
7628       Help
7629
7630       Dismiss
7631
7632
7633       Choose  a  font name from the Font Name sub-menu. Additional font names
7634       can be specified with the font browser. You can change the  menu  names
7635       by setting the X resources font1 through font9.
7636
7637       Choose  a font color from the Font Color sub-menu. Additional font col‐
7638       ors can be specified with the color browser. You can  change  the  menu
7639       colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7640
7641       If you select the color browser and press Grab, you can choose the font
7642       color by moving the pointer to the desired  color  on  the  screen  and
7643       press any button.
7644
7645       If  you choose to rotate the text, choose Rotate Text from the menu and
7646       select an angle. Typically you will only want to  rotate  one  line  of
7647       text at a time. Depending on the angle you choose, subsequent lines may
7648       end up overwriting each other.
7649
7650       Choosing a font and its color is optional. The default  font  is  fixed
7651       and  the default color is black. However, you must choose a location to
7652       begin entering text and press a button. An  underscore  character  will
7653       appear  at  the location of the pointer. The cursor changes to a pencil
7654       to indicate you are in text mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7655
7656       In text mode, any key presses will display the character at  the  loca‐
7657       tion  of  the  underscore and advance the underscore cursor. Enter your
7658       text and once completed press Apply to finish your image annotation. To
7659       correct  errors  press  BACK  SPACE.  To delete an entire line of text,
7660       press DELETE.  Any text that exceeds the boundaries of the image window
7661       is automatically continued onto the next line.
7662
7663       The  actual  color you request for the font is saved in the image. How‐
7664       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7665       example,  on  a  monochrome  screen the text will appear black or white
7666       even if you choose the color red as the font color. However, the  image
7667       saved  to  a  file with -write is written with red lettering. To assure
7668       the correct color text in the final image,  any  PseudoClass  image  is
7669       promoted  to DirectClass (see miff(5)). To force a PseudoClass image to
7670       remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7671

IMAGE COMPOSITING

7673       An image composite is created interactively. There is no  command  line
7674       argument to composite an image. To begin, choose Composite of the Image
7675       Edit from the Command widget. Alternatively, press x in the Image  win‐
7676       dow.
7677
7678       First  a  popup  window  is  displayed requesting you to enter an image
7679       name.  Press Composite, Grab or type a file name. Press Cancel  if  you
7680       choose  not to create a composite image. When you choose Grab, move the
7681       pointer to the desired window and press any button.
7682
7683       If the Composite image does not have any  matte  information,  you  are
7684       informed  and  the file browser is displayed again. Enter the name of a
7685       mask image. The image is typically grayscale and the same size  as  the
7686       composite  image.  If  the  image  is not grayscale, it is converted to
7687       grayscale and the resulting intensities are used as matte information.
7688
7689       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7690       window.  You are now in composite mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7691       miss.  In composite mode, the Command widget has these options:
7692
7693
7694       Operators
7695
7696
7697       over
7698
7699       in
7700
7701       out
7702
7703       atop
7704
7705       xor
7706
7707       plus
7708
7709       minus
7710
7711       add
7712
7713       subtract
7714
7715       difference
7716
7717       bumpmap
7718
7719       replace
7720
7721
7722       Blend
7723
7724       Displace
7725
7726       Help
7727
7728       Dismiss
7729
7730
7731       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7732       widget.  How  each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7733       the image currently displayed on your X server and image is  the  image
7734       obtained
7735
7736       over     The  result  is  the union of the two image shapes, with image
7737              obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7738
7739       in      The result is simply image cut by the shape  of  image  window.
7740              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7741
7742       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7743              out.
7744
7745       atop    The result is the  same  shape  as  image  window,  with  image
7746              obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7747              differs from over because the portion  of  image  outside  image
7748              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7749
7750       xor      The  result is the image data from both image and image window
7751              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7752
7753       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7754              cropped  to  255 (no overflow). This operation is independent of
7755              the matte channels.
7756
7757       minus   The result of image - image window, with underflow  cropped  to
7758              zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to 255, full coverage).
7759
7760       add      The  result  of  image  + image window, with overflow wrapping
7761              around (mod 256).
7762
7763       subtract
7764               The result of image - image  window,  with  underflow  wrapping
7765              around  (mod 256). The add and subtract operators can be used to
7766              perform reversible transformations.
7767
7768       difference
7769               The result of abs(image - image window).  This  is  useful  for
7770              comparing two very similar images.
7771
7772       bumpmap
7773               The result of image window shaded by window.
7774
7775       replace
7776                The resulting image is image window replaced with image.  Here
7777              the matte information is ignored.
7778
7779              The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel  in  the
7780              image  for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7781              mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for  the  image.
7782              This  is  the  case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7783              inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on  the
7784              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7785              ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color  to  pixel  location
7786              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7787              a matte channel.
7788
7789              If you choose blend, the composite operator becomes  over.   The
7790              image  matte channel percent transparency is initialized to fac‐
7791              tor.  The image window is  initialized  to  (100-factor).  Where
7792              factor is the value you specify in the Dialog widget.
7793
7794              Displace  shifts  the  image pixels as defined by a displacement
7795              map.  With this option, image is used  as  a  displacement  map.
7796              Black,  within  the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
7797              placement. White is a maximum negative displacement  and  middle
7798              gray  is  neutral.  The  displacement is scaled to determine the
7799              pixel shift. By default, the displacement applies  in  both  the
7800              horizontal  and  vertical  directions.  However,  if you specify
7801              mask, image is the horizontal X displacement and mask the verti‐
7802              cal Y displacement.
7803
7804              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7805              colormapped X server visuals  (e.g.   StaticColor,  StaticColor,
7806              GrayScale,   PseudoColor).   Correct  compositing  behavior  may
7807              require a TrueColor or DirectColor visual  or  a  Standard  Col‐
7808              ormap.
7809
7810              Choosing  a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7811              is replace.  However, you must choose a  location  to  composite
7812              your  image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7813              releasing and an outline of the image will appear  to  help  you
7814              identify your location.
7815
7816              The  actual colors of the composite image is saved. However, the
7817              color that appears in image window may be different.  For  exam‐
7818              ple,  on  a  monochrome screen Image window will appear black or
7819              white even though your composited image may have many colors. If
7820              the image is saved to a file it is written with the correct col‐
7821              ors. To assure the correct colors are saved in the final  image,
7822              any PseudoClass image is promoted to DirectClass (see miff).  To
7823              force a PseudoClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7824

COLOR EDITING

7826       Changing the the color of a set of pixels is  performed  interactively.
7827       There  is  no  command  line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, choose
7828       Color from the Image Edit submenu  of  the  Command  widget.   Alterna‐
7829       tively, press c in the image window.
7830
7831       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7832       window. You are now in color edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7833       miss.  In color edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7834
7835
7836       Method
7837
7838
7839       point
7840
7841       replace
7842
7843       floodfill
7844
7845       reset
7846
7847
7848       Pixel Color
7849
7850
7851       black
7852
7853       blue
7854
7855       cyan
7856
7857       green
7858
7859       gray
7860
7861       red
7862
7863       magenta
7864
7865       yellow
7866
7867       white
7868
7869       Browser...
7870
7871
7872       Border Color
7873
7874
7875       black
7876
7877       blue
7878
7879       cyan
7880
7881       green
7882
7883       gray
7884
7885       red
7886
7887       magenta
7888
7889       yellow
7890
7891       white
7892
7893       Browser...
7894
7895
7896       Fuzz
7897
7898
7899       0
7900
7901       2
7902
7903       4
7904
7905       8
7906
7907       16
7908           Dialog...
7909
7910
7911       Undo
7912
7913       Help
7914
7915       Dismiss
7916
7917
7918       Choose  a  color editing method from the Method sub-menu of the Command
7919       widget. The point method recolors any pixel selected with  the  pointer
7920       unless  the  button  is released. The replace method recolors any pixel
7921       that matches the color of the pixel you select  with  a  button  press.
7922       Floodfill  recolors  any  pixel that matches the color of the pixel you
7923       select with a button press and is  a  neighbor.   Whereas  filltoborder
7924       changes  the  matte  value of any neighbor pixel that is not the border
7925       color.  Finally reset changes the entire image to the designated color.
7926
7927       Next, choose a pixel color from the Pixel  Color  sub-menu.  Additional
7928       pixel  colors  can  be specified with the color browser. You can change
7929       the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7930
7931       Now press button 1 to select a pixel within the Image window to  change
7932       its  color.  Additional  pixels  may  be recolored as prescribed by the
7933       method you choose. additional pixels by increasing the Delta value.
7934
7935       If the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning  your
7936       pointer  within  the  image  (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can
7937       select a pixel to recolor from within  the  Magnify  widget.  Move  the
7938       pointer  to  the  Magnify widget and position the pixel with the cursor
7939       control keys. Finally, press a button to recolor the selected pixel (or
7940       pixels).
7941
7942       The actual color you request for the pixels is saved in the image. How‐
7943       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7944       example,  on  a  monochrome screen the pixel will appear black or white
7945       even if you choose the color red as the pixel color. However, the image
7946       saved  to  a file with -write is written with red pixels. To assure the
7947       correct color text in the final image, any PseudoClass  image  is  pro‐
7948       moted  to  DirectClass  To  force a PseudoClass image to remain Pseudo‐
7949       Class, use -colors.
7950

MATTE EDITING

7952       Matte information within an image is useful for some operations such as
7953       image compositing. This extra channel usually defines a mask which rep‐
7954       resents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image. This is the case  when
7955       matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels inside the shape, zero outside,
7956       and between zero and 255 on the boundary.
7957
7958       Setting the matte information in an image is done interactively.  There
7959       is no command line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, and choose Matte
7960       of the Image Edit sub-menu from the Command widget.
7961
7962       Alternatively, press m in the image window.
7963
7964       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7965       window. You are now in matte edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7966       miss.  In matte edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7967
7968
7969       Method
7970
7971
7972       point
7973
7974       replace
7975
7976       floodfill
7977
7978       reset
7979
7980
7981       Border Color
7982
7983
7984       black
7985
7986       blue
7987
7988       cyan
7989
7990       green
7991
7992       gray
7993
7994       red
7995
7996       magenta
7997
7998       yellow
7999
8000       white
8001
8002       Browser...
8003
8004
8005       Fuzz
8006
8007
8008       0
8009
8010       2
8011
8012       4
8013
8014       8
8015
8016       16
8017           Dialog...
8018
8019
8020       Matte
8021
8022       Undo
8023
8024       Help
8025
8026       Dismiss
8027
8028       Choose a matte editing method from the Method sub-menu of  the  Command
8029       widget.  The  point  method  changes  the  matte value of the any pixel
8030       selected with the pointer until the button  is  released.  The  replace
8031       method  changes  the matte value of any pixel that matches the color of
8032       the pixel you select with a button press. Floodfill changes  the  matte
8033       value  of any pixel that matches the color of the pixel you select with
8034       a button press and is a neighbor.  Whereas  filltoborder  recolors  any
8035       neighbor  pixel that is not the border color. Finally reset changes the
8036       entire image to the designated matte value.  Choose Matte Value  and  a
8037       dialog  appears  requesting a matte value.  Enter a value between 0 and
8038       255. This value is assigned as the matte value of the selected pixel or
8039       pixels.   Now, press any button to select a pixel within the Image win‐
8040       dow to change its matte value. You can change the matte value of  addi‐
8041       tional  pixels  by increasing the Delta value. The Delta value is first
8042       added then subtracted from the red,  green,  and  blue  of  the  target
8043       color. Any pixels within the range also have their matte value updated.
8044       If the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning  your
8045       pointer  within  the  image  (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can
8046       select a pixel to change the matte value from within the  Magnify  wid‐
8047       get.   Move  the  pointer  to the Magnify widget and position the pixel
8048       with the cursor control keys. Finally, press a  button  to  change  the
8049       matte  value  of  the selected pixel (or pixels).  Matte information is
8050       only valid in a DirectClass image. Therefore, any PseudoClass image  is
8051       promoted to DirectClass. Note that matte information for PseudoClass is
8052       not retained for colormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor,  Stat‐
8053       icColor, GrayScale, PseudoColor) unless you immediately save your image
8054       to a file (refer to Write). Correct matte editing behavior may  require
8055       a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
8056

IMAGE DRAWING

8058       An image is drawn upon interactively. There is no command line argument
8059       to draw on an image. To begin, choose Draw of the Image  Edit  sub-menu
8060       from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press d in the image window.
8061
8062       The  cursor changes to a crosshair to indicate you are in draw mode. To
8063       exit immediately, press Dismiss. In draw mode, the Command  widget  has
8064       these options:
8065
8066
8067       Primitive
8068
8069
8070       point
8071
8072       line
8073
8074       rectangle
8075
8076       fill rectangle
8077
8078       circle
8079
8080       fill circle
8081
8082       ellipse
8083
8084       fill ellipse
8085
8086       polygon
8087
8088       fill polygon
8089
8090
8091       Color
8092
8093
8094       black
8095
8096       blue
8097
8098       cyan
8099
8100       green
8101
8102       gray
8103
8104       red
8105
8106       magenta
8107
8108       yellow
8109
8110       white
8111
8112       transparent
8113
8114       Browser...
8115
8116
8117       Stipple
8118
8119
8120       Brick
8121
8122       Diagonal
8123
8124       Scales
8125
8126       Vertical
8127
8128       Wavy
8129
8130       Translucent
8131
8132       Opaque
8133
8134       Open...
8135
8136
8137       Width
8138
8139
8140       1
8141
8142       2
8143
8144       4
8145
8146       8
8147
8148       16
8149           Dialog...
8150
8151
8152       Undo
8153
8154       Help
8155
8156       Dismiss
8157
8158       Choose a drawing primitive from the Primitive sub-menu.
8159
8160       Next,  choose a color from the Color sub-menu. Additional colors can be
8161       specified with the color browser. You can change  the  menu  colors  by
8162       setting  the  X  resources  pen1  through  pen9.  The transparent color
8163       updates the image matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8164
8165       If you choose the color browser and press  Grab,  you  can  select  the
8166       primitive  color  by  moving  the  pointer  to the desired color on the
8167       screen and press any button. The transparent color  updates  the  image
8168       matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8169
8170       Choose a stipple, if appropriate, from the Stipple sub-menu. Additional
8171       stipples can be specified with the file browser. Stipples obtained from
8172       the file browser must be on disk in the X11 bitmap format.
8173
8174       Choose a line width, if appropriate, from the Width sub-menu. To choose
8175       a specific width select the Dialog widget.
8176
8177       Choose a point in the image window and press button 1 and  hold.  Next,
8178       move  the pointer to another location in the image. As you move, a line
8179       connects the initial location and the pointer.  When  you  release  the
8180       button,  the  image  is  updated  with the primitive you just drew. For
8181       polygons, the image is updated when you press and  release  the  button
8182       without moving the pointer.
8183
8184       To cancel image drawing, move the pointer back to the starting point of
8185       the line and release the button.
8186

REGION OF INTEREST

8188       To begin, press choose Region of Interest of the Pixel  Transform  sub-
8189       menu from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press R in the image win‐
8190       dow.
8191
8192       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
8193       window.  You  are now in region of interest mode. In region of interest
8194       mode, the Command widget has these options:
8195
8196
8197       Help
8198
8199       Dismiss
8200
8201
8202       To define a region of interest, press button 1 and drag. The region  of
8203       interest  is  defined  by  a highlighted rectangle that expands or con‐
8204       tracts as it follows the pointer.  Once  you  are  satisfied  with  the
8205       region  of  interest, release the button. You are now in apply mode. In
8206       apply mode the Command widget has these options:
8207
8208
8209       File
8210
8211
8212       Save...
8213
8214       Print...
8215
8216
8217       Edit
8218
8219
8220       Undo
8221
8222       Redo
8223
8224
8225       Transform
8226
8227
8228       Flip
8229
8230       Flop
8231
8232       Rotate Right
8233
8234       Rotate Left
8235
8236
8237       Enhance
8238
8239
8240       Hue...
8241
8242       Saturation...
8243
8244       Brightness...
8245
8246       Gamma...
8247
8248       Spiff
8249
8250       Dull
8251
8252       Equalize
8253
8254       Normalize
8255
8256       Negate
8257
8258       GRAYscale
8259
8260       Quantize...
8261
8262
8263       Effects
8264
8265
8266       Despeckle
8267
8268       Emboss
8269
8270       Reduce Noise
8271
8272       Add Noise
8273
8274       Sharpen...
8275
8276       Blur...
8277
8278       Threshold...
8279
8280       Edge Detect...
8281
8282       Spread...
8283
8284       Shade...
8285
8286       Raise...
8287
8288       Segment...
8289
8290
8291
8292
8293       F/X
8294
8295
8296       Solarize...
8297
8298       Swirl...
8299
8300       Implode...
8301
8302       Wave...
8303
8304       Oil Paint
8305
8306       Charcoal Draw...
8307
8308
8309
8310
8311       Miscellany
8312
8313
8314       Image Info
8315
8316       Zoom Image
8317
8318       Show Preview...
8319
8320       Show Histogram
8321
8322       Show Matte
8323
8324
8325       Help
8326
8327       Dismiss
8328
8329
8330       You can make adjustments to  the  region  of  interest  by  moving  the
8331       pointer  to  one of the rectangle corners, pressing a button, and drag‐
8332       ging. Finally, choose an image processing technique  from  the  Command
8333       widget.  You  can  choose  more  than one image processing technique to
8334       apply to an area. Alternatively, you can move the  region  of  interest
8335       before applying another image processing technique. To exit, press Dis‐
8336       miss.
8337

IMAGE PANNING

8339       When an image exceeds the width or height of the X server screen,  dis‐
8340       play  maps  a small panning icon. The rectangle within the panning icon
8341       shows the area that is currently displayed in the the image window.  To
8342       pan  about  the image, press any button and drag the pointer within the
8343       panning icon.  The pan rectangle moves with the pointer and  the  image
8344       window  is  updated to reflect the location of the rectangle within the
8345       panning icon. When you have selected the area of the image you wish  to
8346       view, release the button.
8347
8348       Use  the arrow keys to pan the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
8349       within the image window.
8350
8351       The panning icon is withdrawn if the image  becomes  smaller  than  the
8352       dimensions of the X server screen.
8353

USER PREFERENCES

8355       Preferences  affect the default behavior of display(1). The preferences
8356       are either true or false and are stored in your home directory as .dis‐
8357       playrc:
8358
8359                display image centered on a backdrop"
8360
8361
8362                    This  backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is
8363                    useful for hiding other X window  activity  while  viewing
8364                    the  image.  The color of the backdrop is specified as the
8365                    background color. Refer to X Resources for details.
8366                confirm on program exit"
8367
8368
8369                    Ask for a confirmation before exiting the display(1)  pro‐
8370                    gram.
8371                correct image for display gamma"
8372
8373
8374                    If  the image has a known gamma, the gamma is corrected to
8375                    match that of the  X  server  (see  the  X  Resource  dis‐
8376                    playGamma).
8377                display warning messages"
8378
8379
8380                    Display any warning messages.
8381                apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to image"
8382
8383
8384                    The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity res‐
8385                    olution for spatial resolution by averaging  the  intensi‐
8386                    ties  of  several neighboring pixels.  Images which suffer
8387                    from  severe  contouring  when  reducing  colors  can   be
8388                    improved with this preference.
8389                use a shared colormap for colormapped X visuals"
8390
8391
8392                    This  option only applies when the default X server visual
8393                    is PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer  to  -visual  for  more
8394                    details.  By  default, a shared colormap is allocated. The
8395                    image shares colors with other X clients.  Some image col‐
8396                    ors  could  be approximated, therefore your image may look
8397                    very different than intended. Otherwise the  image  colors
8398                    appear exactly as they are defined. However, other clients
8399                    may go technicolor when the image colormap is installed.
8400                display images as an X server pixmap"
8401
8402
8403                    Images are maintained as a XImage  by  default.  Set  this
8404                    resource  to True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This
8405                    option is useful if your image exceeds the  dimensions  of
8406                    your  server  screen and you intend to pan the image. Pan‐
8407                    ning is much faster  with  Pixmaps  than  with  a  XImage.
8408                    Pixmaps  are considered a precious resource, use them with
8409                    discretion.
8410
8411
8412
8413       GM IDENTIFY
8414
8415              Identify describes the format and characteristics of one or more
8416              image  files  as  internally  supported by the software. It will
8417              also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.  The  informa‐
8418              tion  displayed  includes  the  scene number, the file name, the
8419              width and height of the image, whether the image is  colormapped
8420              or  not,  the number of colors in the image, the number of bytes
8421              in the image, the format of the image  (JPEG,  PNM,  etc.),  and
8422              finally the number of seconds in both user time and elapsed time
8423              it took to read and process the image.  If -verbose or +ping are
8424              provided as an option, the pixel read rate is also displayed. An
8425              example line output from identify follows:
8426
8427                  images/aquarium.miff 640x480 PseudoClass 256c
8428                         308135b MIFF 0.000u 0:01
8429
8430
8431              If -verbose is set, expect additional output including any image
8432              comment:
8433
8434
8435                  Image: images/aquarium.miff
8436                  class: PseudoClass
8437                  colors: 256
8438                  signature: eb5dca81dd93ae7e6ffae99a527eb5dca8...
8439                  matte: False
8440                  geometry: 640x480
8441                     depth: 8
8442                  bytes: 308135
8443                  format: MIFF
8444                  comments:
8445                  Imported from MTV raster image: aquarium.mtv
8446
8447
8448              For  some  formats, additional format-specific information about
8449              the file will be written if  the  -debug  coder  or  -debug  all
8450              option is used.
8451

IDENTIFY OPTIONS

8453       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8454       the command line remains in effect for the set  of  images  immediately
8455       following,  until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option
8456       or -noop.
8457
8458       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8459
8460
8461       -authenticate <string>
8462              decrypt image with this password
8463
8464       -debug <events>
8465              enable debug printout
8466
8467       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8468              add coder/decoder specific options
8469
8470       -density <width>x<height>
8471              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8472
8473       -depth <value>
8474              depth of the image
8475
8476       -format <string>
8477              output formatted image characteristics
8478
8479       -help  print usage instructions
8480
8481       -interlace <type>
8482              the type of interlacing scheme
8483
8484       -limit <type> <value>
8485              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
8486              resource limit
8487
8488       -log <string>
8489              Specify format for debug log
8490
8491       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8492
8493       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8494              chroma subsampling factors
8495
8496       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
8497              width and height of the image
8498
8499       -verbose
8500              print detailed information about the image
8501
8502       -version
8503              print GraphicsMagick version string
8504
8505              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
8506              above.
8507
8508

GM IMPORT

8510       Import reads an image from any visible window on an X server  and  out‐
8511       puts  it  as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
8512       screen, or any rectangular portion of  the  screen.   Use  display  for
8513       redisplay,  printing, editing, formatting, archiving, image processing,
8514       etc. of the captured image.
8515
8516       The target window can be specified by id, name, or may be  selected  by
8517       clicking  the  mouse  in  the desired window. If you press a button and
8518       then drag, a rectangle will form which expands  and  contracts  as  the
8519       mouse  moves.  To save the portion of the screen defined by the rectan‐
8520       gle, just release the button. The keyboard bell is  rung  once  at  the
8521       beginning of the screen capture and twice when it completes.
8522

EXAMPLES

8524       To  select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and save
8525       it in the MIFF image format to a file entitled window.miff, use:
8526
8527           gm import window.miff
8528
8529
8530       To select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and  save
8531       it  in  the  Encapsulated PostScript format to include in another docu‐
8532       ment, use:
8533
8534           gm import figure.eps
8535
8536
8537       To capture the entire X server screen in the JPEG  image  format  in  a
8538       file entitled root.jpeg, without using the mouse, use:
8539
8540           gm import -window root root.jpeg
8541
8542
8543       To  capture  the 512x256 area at the upper right corner of the X server
8544       screen in the PNG image format in a well-compressed file entitled  cor‐
8545       ner.png, without using the mouse,  use:
8546
8547           gm import -window root -crop 512x256-0+0 -quality 90
8548                  corner.png
8549
8550

OPTIONS

8552       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8553       the command line remains in effect until it is  explicitly  changed  by
8554       specifying the option again with a different effect.
8555
8556       Import  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resources
8557       file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values  specified
8558       in your X resources file.
8559
8560       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8561
8562
8563       -bordercolor <color>
8564              the border color
8565
8566       -colors <value>
8567              preferred number of colors in the image
8568
8569       -colorspace <value>
8570              the type of colorspace
8571
8572       -comment <string>
8573              annotate an image with a comment
8574
8575       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8576              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8577
8578       -debug <events>
8579              enable debug printout
8580
8581       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8582              add coder/decoder specific options
8583
8584       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8585              display the next image after pausing
8586
8587       -density <width>x<height>
8588              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8589
8590       -depth <value>
8591              depth of the image
8592
8593       -descend
8594              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
8595
8596       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8597              specifies the X server to contact
8598
8599       -dispose <method>
8600              GIF disposal method
8601
8602       -dither
8603              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8604
8605       -encoding <type>
8606              specify the text encoding
8607
8608       -endian <type>
8609              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8610
8611       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
8612
8613       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8614              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8615
8616       -help  print usage instructions
8617
8618       -interlace <type>
8619              the type of interlacing scheme
8620
8621       -label <name>
8622              assign a label to an image
8623
8624       -limit <type> <value>
8625              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
8626              resource limit
8627
8628       -log <string>
8629              Specify format for debug log
8630
8631       -monitor
8632              show progress indication
8633
8634       -monochrome
8635              transform the image to black and white
8636
8637       -negate
8638              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8639
8640       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8641              size and location of an image canvas
8642
8643       -pause <seconds>
8644              pause between snapshots [import]
8645
8646       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8647
8648       -pointsize <value>
8649              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8650
8651       -quality <value>
8652              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8653
8654       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8655              resize an image
8656
8657       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
8658              rotate the image
8659
8660       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8661              chroma subsampling factors
8662
8663       -scene <value>
8664              set scene number
8665
8666       -screen
8667              specify the screen to capture
8668
8669       -set <attribute> <value>
8670              set an image attribute
8671
8672       +set <attribute>
8673              unset an image attribute
8674
8675       -silent
8676              operate silently
8677
8678       -snaps <value>
8679              number of screen snapshots
8680
8681       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8682              resize an image (quickly)
8683
8684       -transparent <color>
8685              make this color transparent within the image
8686
8687       -trim  trim an image
8688
8689       -verbose
8690              print detailed information about the image
8691
8692       -version
8693              print GraphicsMagick version string
8694
8695              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
8696              above.
8697
8698

GM MOGRIFY

8700       Mogrify  transforms  an image or a sequence of images. These transforms
8701       include image scaling, image rotation,  color  reduction,  and  others.
8702       Each  transmogrified image overwrites the corresponding original image,
8703       unless an option such as -format causes the output filename to be  dif‐
8704       ferent from the input filename.
8705
8706       The  graphics  formats  supported by mogrify are listed in GraphicsMag‐
8707       ick(1).
8708

EXAMPLES

8710       To convert all the TIFF files in a particular directory to JPEG, use:
8711
8712           gm mogrify -format jpeg *.tiff
8713
8714
8715       To convert a directory full of JPEG images to thumbnails, use:
8716
8717           gm mogrify -size 120x120 *.jpg -resize 120x120 +profile "*"
8718
8719
8720       In this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder  that
8721       the  images  are  going to be downscaled to 120x120, allowing it to run
8722       faster by avoiding returning full-resolution images  to  GraphicsMagick
8723       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
8724       the desired dimensions of the output images.  It will be scaled so  its
8725       largest  dimension  is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes any ICM,
8726       EXIF, IPTC, or other profiles that might be present in  the  input  and
8727       aren't needed in the thumbnails.
8728
8729       To  scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and 480
8730       pixels in height, use:
8731
8732           gm mogrify -resize 640x480! cockatoo.miff
8733
8734

OPTIONS

8736       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
8737       the  command line remains in effect for the set of images that follows,
8738       until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
8739
8740       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8741
8742
8743       -affine <matrix>
8744              drawing transform matrix
8745
8746       -antialias
8747              remove pixel aliasing
8748
8749        -asc-cdl <spec>
8750              apply ASC CDL color transform
8751
8752       -authenticate <string>
8753              decrypt image with this password
8754
8755       -auto-orient
8756              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
8757
8758       -background <color>
8759              the background color
8760
8761       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
8762              pixels below the threshold become black
8763
8764       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
8765              blue chromaticity primary point
8766
8767       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
8768              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8769
8770       -border <width>x<height>
8771              surround the image with a border of color
8772
8773       -bordercolor <color>
8774              the border color
8775
8776       -channel <type>
8777              the type of channel
8778
8779       -charcoal <factor>
8780              simulate a charcoal drawing
8781
8782       -colorize <value>
8783              colorize the image with the pen color
8784
8785       -colors <value>
8786              preferred number of colors in the image
8787
8788       -colorspace <value>
8789              the type of colorspace
8790
8791       -comment <string>
8792              annotate an image with a comment
8793
8794       -compose <operator>
8795              the type of image composition
8796
8797       -compress <type>
8798              the type of image compression
8799
8800       -contrast
8801              enhance or reduce the image contrast
8802
8803       -convolve <kernel>
8804              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
8805
8806       -create-directories
8807              create output directory if required
8808
8809       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8810              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8811
8812       -cycle <amount>
8813              displace image colormap by amount
8814
8815       -debug <events>
8816              enable debug printout
8817
8818       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8819              add coder/decoder specific options
8820
8821       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8822              display the next image after pausing
8823
8824       -density <width>x<height>
8825              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8826
8827       -depth <value>
8828              depth of the image
8829
8830       -despeckle
8831              reduce the speckles within an image
8832
8833       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8834              specifies the X server to contact
8835
8836       -dispose <method>
8837              GIF disposal method
8838
8839       -dither
8840              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8841
8842       -draw <string>
8843              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
8844
8845       -edge <radius>
8846              detect edges within an image
8847
8848       -emboss <radius>
8849              emboss an image
8850
8851       -encoding <type>
8852              specify the text encoding
8853
8854       -endian <type>
8855              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8856
8857       -enhance
8858              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
8859
8860       -equalize
8861              perform histogram equalization to the image
8862
8863       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8864              composite image on background color canvas image
8865
8866       -fill <color>
8867              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
8868
8869       -filter <type>
8870              use this type of filter when resizing an image
8871
8872       -flip  create a "mirror image"
8873
8874       -flop  create a "mirror image"
8875
8876       -font <name>
8877              use this font when annotating the image with text
8878
8879       -format <type>
8880              the image format type
8881
8882       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
8883              surround the image with an ornamental border
8884
8885       -fuzz <distance>{%}
8886              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
8887
8888       -gamma <value>
8889              level of gamma correction
8890
8891       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
8892              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8893
8894       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8895              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8896
8897       -gravity <type>
8898              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
8899
8900       -green-primary <x>,<y>
8901              green chromaticity primary point
8902
8903       -hald-clut <clut>
8904              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
8905
8906       -help  print usage instructions
8907
8908       -implode <factor>
8909              implode image pixels about the center
8910
8911       -interlace <type>
8912              the type of interlacing scheme
8913
8914       -label <name>
8915              assign a label to an image
8916
8917       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
8918              perform local adaptive thresholding
8919
8920       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
8921              adjust the level of image contrast
8922
8923       -limit <type> <value>
8924              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
8925              resource limit
8926
8927       -linewidth
8928              the line width for subsequent draw operations
8929
8930       -list <type>
8931              the type of list
8932
8933       -log <string>
8934              Specify format for debug log
8935
8936       -loop <iterations>
8937              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
8938
8939       -magnify
8940              magnify the image
8941
8942       -map <filename>
8943              choose a particular set of colors from this image
8944
8945       -mask <filename>
8946              Specify a clipping mask
8947
8948       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
8949
8950       -mattecolor <color>
8951              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
8952
8953       -median <radius>
8954              apply a median filter to the image
8955
8956       -minify <factor>
8957              minify the image
8958
8959       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
8960              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
8961
8962       -monitor
8963              show progress indication
8964
8965       -monochrome
8966              transform the image to black and white
8967
8968       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
8969              Simulate motion blur
8970
8971       -negate
8972              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8973
8974       -noise <radius|type>
8975              add or reduce noise in an image
8976
8977       -noop  NOOP (no option)
8978
8979       -normalize
8980              transform image to span the full range of color values
8981
8982       -opaque <color>
8983              change this color to the pen color within the image
8984
8985       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
8986              apply  a  mathematical,  bitwise,  or value operator to an image
8987              channel
8988
8989       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
8990              ordered dither the image
8991
8992       -output-directory <directory>
8993              output files to directory
8994
8995       -orient <orientation>
8996              Set the image orientation attribute
8997
8998       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8999              size and location of an image canvas
9000
9001       -paint <radius>
9002              simulate an oil painting
9003
9004       -pen <color>
9005              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9006
9007       -pointsize <value>
9008              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9009
9010       -profile <filename>
9011              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
9012
9013       -preserve-timestamp
9014              preserve the original timestamps of the file
9015
9016       -quality <value>
9017              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9018
9019       -raise <width>x<height>
9020              lighten or darken image edges
9021
9022       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
9023              random threshold the image
9024
9025       -recolor <matrix>
9026              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
9027
9028       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9029              red chromaticity primary point
9030
9031       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9032              apply options to a portion of the image
9033
9034       -render
9035              render vector operations
9036
9037       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9038              Adjust image page offsets
9039
9040       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
9041              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
9042
9043       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9044              resize an image
9045
9046       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9047              roll an image vertically or horizontally
9048
9049       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9050              rotate the image
9051
9052       -sample <geometry>
9053              scale image using pixel sampling
9054
9055       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9056              chroma subsampling factors
9057
9058       -scale <geometry>
9059              scale the image.
9060
9061       -scene <value>
9062              set scene number
9063
9064       -set <attribute> <value>
9065              set an image attribute
9066
9067       +set <attribute>
9068              unset an image attribute
9069
9070       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
9071              segment an image
9072
9073       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
9074              shade the image using a distant light source
9075
9076       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9077              sharpen the image
9078
9079       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
9080              shave pixels from the image edges
9081
9082       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
9083              shear the image along the X or Y axis
9084
9085       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9086              width and height of the image
9087
9088       -solarize <factor>
9089              negate all pixels above the threshold level
9090
9091       -spread <amount>
9092              displace image pixels by a random amount
9093
9094       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9095
9096       -stroke <color>
9097              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9098
9099       -strokewidth <value>
9100              set the stroke width
9101
9102       -swirl <degrees>
9103              swirl image pixels about the center
9104
9105       -texture <filename>
9106              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9107
9108       -threshold <value>{%}
9109              threshold the image
9110
9111       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9112              resize an image (quickly)
9113
9114       -tile <filename>
9115              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
9116
9117       -transform
9118              transform the image
9119
9120       -transparent <color>
9121              make this color transparent within the image
9122
9123       -treedepth <value>
9124              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9125
9126       -trim  trim an image
9127
9128       -type <type>
9129              the image type
9130
9131       -units <type>
9132              the units of image resolution
9133
9134       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
9135              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
9136
9137       -verbose
9138              print detailed information about the image
9139
9140       -version
9141              print GraphicsMagick version string
9142
9143       -view <string>
9144              FlashPix viewing parameters
9145
9146       -virtual-pixel <method>
9147              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
9148
9149       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
9150              alter an image along a sine wave
9151
9152       -white-point <x>,<y>
9153              chromaticity white point
9154
9155       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
9156              pixels above the threshold become white
9157
9158              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
9159              above.
9160
9161

GM MONTAGE

9163       montage creates a composite image by combining several separate images.
9164       The images are tiled on the composite image with the name of the  image
9165       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
9166
9167       The composite image is constructed in the following manner. First, each
9168       image specified on the command line, except for the last, is scaled  to
9169       fit the maximum tile size. The maximum tile size by default is 120x120.
9170       It can be modified with  the  -geometry  command  line  argument  or  X
9171       resource.  See  Options for more information on command line arguments.
9172       See X(1) for more information on X resources.  Note  that  the  maximum
9173       tile size need not be a square.
9174
9175       Next the composite image is initialized with the color specified by the
9176       -background command line argument or X resource. The width  and  height
9177       of  the composite image is determined by the title specified, the maxi‐
9178       mum tile size, the number of tiles per row, the tile border  width  and
9179       height,  the  image  border  width, and the label height. The number of
9180       tiles per row specifies how many images are to appear in  each  row  of
9181       the  composite  image. The default is to have 5 tiles in each row and 4
9182       tiles in each column of the composite.  A specific value  is  specified
9183       with  -tile.  The  tile  border  width and height, and the image border
9184       width defaults to the value of the X resource -borderwidth. It  can  be
9185       changed  with  the -borderwidth or -geometry command line argument or X
9186       resource. The label height is determined by the font you  specify  with
9187       the  -font command line argument or X resource. If you do not specify a
9188       font, a font is chosen that allows the name of the  image  to  fit  the
9189       maximum  width  of a tiled area.  The label colors is determined by the
9190       -background and -fill command line argument or X resource.  Note,  that
9191       if the background and pen colors are the same, labels will not appear.
9192
9193       Initially,  the  composite  image  title is placed at the top if one is
9194       specified (refer to -fill). Next, each image is set onto the  composite
9195       image,  surrounded  by  its  border  color, with its name centered just
9196       below it. The individual images are left-justified within the width  of
9197       the  tiled area.  The order of the images is the same as they appear on
9198       the command line unless the images have a scene  keyword.  If  a  scene
9199       number  is  specified in each image, then the images are tiled onto the
9200       composite in the order of their scene number. Finally, the  last  argu‐
9201       ment  on  the command line is the name assigned to the composite image.
9202       By default, the image is written in the MIFF format and can  be  viewed
9203       or printed with display(1).
9204
9205
9206       Note,  that  if the number of tiles exceeds the default number of 20 (5
9207       per row, 4 per column), more than one composite image  is  created.  To
9208       ensure  a single image is produced, use -tile to increase the number of
9209       tiles to meet or exceed the number of input images.
9210
9211       Finally, to create one or more empty spaces in the sequence  of  tiles,
9212       use the "NULL:" image format.
9213
9214       Note,  a  composite  MIFF  image  displayed to an X server with display
9215       behaves differently than other images. You can think of  the  composite
9216       as  a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of the composite
9217       and press a button to display it. See display(1) and miff(5)
9218

EXAMPLES

9220       To create a montage of a cockatoo, a  parrot,  and  a  hummingbird  and
9221       write it to a file called birds, use:
9222
9223           gm montage cockatoo.miff parrot.miff hummingbird.miff
9224                   birds.miff
9225
9226
9227       To  tile  several  bird  images  so that they are at most 256 pixels in
9228       width and 192 pixels in height, surrounded by a red border,  and  sepa‐
9229       rated by 10 pixels of background color, use:
9230
9231           gm montage -geometry 256x192+10+10 -bordercolor red
9232                   birds.* montage.miff
9233
9234
9235       To  create an unlabeled parrot image, 640 by 480 pixels, and surrounded
9236       by a border of black, use:
9237
9238           gm montage -geometry 640x480 -bordercolor black
9239                   -label "" parrot.miff bird.miff
9240
9241
9242       To create an image of an eagle with a textured background, use:
9243
9244           gm montage -texture bumps.jpg eagle.jpg eagle.png
9245
9246
9247       To join several GIF images together  without  any  extraneous  graphics
9248       (e.g.  no label, no shadowing, no surrounding tile frame), use:
9249
9250           gm montage +frame +shadow +label -tile 5x1
9251                   -geometry 50x50+0+0 *.png joined.png
9252
9253

OPTIONS

9255       Any  option  you  specify on the command line remains in effect for the
9256       group of images following it, until the  group  is  terminated  by  the
9257       appearance  of  any option or -noop.  For example, to make a montage of
9258       three images, the first with 32 colors, the second  with  an  unlimited
9259       number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
9260
9261
9262           gm montage -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
9263                    -colors 16 cockatoo.3 cockatoos.miff
9264
9265
9266       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
9267
9268
9269       -adjoin
9270              join images into a single multi-image file
9271
9272       -affine <matrix>
9273              drawing transform matrix
9274
9275       -authenticate <string>
9276              decrypt image with this password
9277
9278       -background <color>
9279              the background color
9280
9281       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
9282              blue chromaticity primary point
9283
9284       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
9285              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
9286
9287       -bordercolor <color>
9288              the border color
9289
9290       -borderwidth <geometry>
9291              the border width
9292
9293       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9294              remove pixels from the interior of an image
9295
9296       -colors <value>
9297              preferred number of colors in the image
9298
9299       -colorspace <value>
9300              the type of colorspace
9301
9302       -comment <string>
9303              annotate an image with a comment
9304
9305       -compose <operator>
9306              the type of image composition
9307
9308       -compress <type>
9309              the type of image compression
9310
9311       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9312              preferred size and location of the cropped image
9313
9314       -debug <events>
9315              enable debug printout
9316
9317       -define <key>{=<value>},...
9318              add coder/decoder specific options
9319
9320       -density <width>x<height>
9321              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
9322
9323       -depth <value>
9324              depth of the image
9325
9326       -display <host:display[.screen]>
9327              specifies the X server to contact
9328
9329       -dispose <method>
9330              GIF disposal method
9331
9332       -dither
9333              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
9334
9335       -draw <string>
9336              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
9337
9338       -encoding <type>
9339              specify the text encoding
9340
9341       -endian <type>
9342              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
9343
9344       -fill <color>
9345              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
9346
9347       -filter <type>
9348              use this type of filter when resizing an image
9349
9350       -font <name>
9351              use this font when annotating the image with text
9352
9353       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
9354              surround the image with an ornamental border
9355
9356       -gamma <value>
9357              level of gamma correction
9358
9359       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
9360              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
9361
9362       -gravity <type>
9363              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
9364
9365       -green-primary <x>,<y>
9366              green chromaticity primary point
9367
9368       -help  print usage instructions
9369
9370       -interlace <type>
9371              the type of interlacing scheme
9372
9373       -label <name>
9374              assign a label to an image
9375
9376       -limit <type> <value>
9377              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
9378              resource limit
9379
9380       -log <string>
9381              Specify format for debug log
9382
9383       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
9384
9385       -mattecolor <color>
9386              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
9387
9388       -mode <value>
9389              mode of operation
9390
9391       -monitor
9392              show progress indication
9393
9394       -monochrome
9395              transform the image to black and white
9396
9397       -noop  NOOP (no option)
9398
9399       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
9400              size and location of an image canvas
9401
9402       -pen <color>
9403              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9404
9405       -pointsize <value>
9406              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9407
9408       -quality <value>
9409              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9410
9411       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9412              red chromaticity primary point
9413
9414       -render
9415              render vector operations
9416
9417       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9418              Adjust image page offsets
9419
9420       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9421              resize an image
9422
9423       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9424              rotate the image
9425
9426       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9427              chroma subsampling factors
9428
9429       -scenes <value-value>
9430              range of image scene numbers to read
9431
9432       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
9433              shadow the montage
9434
9435       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9436              sharpen the image
9437
9438       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9439              width and height of the image
9440
9441       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9442
9443       -stroke <color>
9444              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9445
9446       -strokewidth <value>
9447              set the stroke width
9448
9449       -texture <filename>
9450              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9451
9452       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9453              resize an image (quickly)
9454
9455       -tile <geometry>
9456              layout of images [montage]
9457
9458       -title <string>
9459              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
9460
9461       -transform
9462              transform the image
9463
9464       -transparent <color>
9465              make this color transparent within the image
9466
9467       -treedepth <value>
9468              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9469
9470       -trim  trim an image
9471
9472       -type <type>
9473              the image type
9474
9475       -verbose
9476              print detailed information about the image
9477
9478       -version
9479              print GraphicsMagick version string
9480
9481       -white-point <x>,<y>
9482              chromaticity white point
9483
9484              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
9485              above.
9486
9487

X RESOURCES

9489       Montage  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resource
9490       file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your  X
9491       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
9492
9493       All  montage options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, mon‐
9494       tage uses the following X resources:
9495
9496       background (class Background)
9497              background color
9498
9499              Specifies the preferred color to use  for  the  composite  image
9500              background.  The default is #ccc.
9501
9502       borderColor (class BorderColor)
9503              border color
9504
9505              Specifies  the  preferred  color  to use for the composite image
9506              border. The default is #ccc.
9507
9508       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
9509              border width
9510
9511              Specifies the width in pixels of the composite image border. The
9512              default is 2.
9513
9514       font (class Font)
9515              font to use
9516
9517              Specifies  the name of the preferred font to use when displaying
9518              text within the composite image. The default is 9x15, fixed,  or
9519              5x8 determined by the composite image size.
9520
9521       matteColor (class MatteColor)
9522              color of the frame
9523
9524              Specify  the color of an image frame. A 3D effect is achieved by
9525              using highlight and shadow colors derived from this  color.  The
9526              default value is #697B8F.
9527
9528       pen (class Pen)
9529              text color
9530
9531              Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the compos‐
9532              ite image.  The default is black.
9533
9534       title (class Title)
9535              composite image title
9536
9537              This resource specifies the title to be placed at the top of the
9538              composite  image. The default is not to place a title at the top
9539              of the composite image.
9540

GM TIME

DESCRIPTION

9543       time executes an  arbitrary  gm  utility  command  (e.g.  convert)  and
9544       reports  the  user and elapsed time.  This provides way to measure com‐
9545       mand execution times similar to the Unix ´time' command but in a porta‐
9546       ble and consistent way.
9547

EXAMPLES

9549       To obtain time information for the execution of a command:
9550
9551       %  gm time convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm convert input.ppm
9552       -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm    22.60s user 0.00s system  2354%  cpu  0.960
9553       total
9554
9555       Here is the interpretation of the above output:
9556
9557           user - the total user time consumed.
9558           system - the total system time consumed.
9559           total - the total elapsed time consumed.
9560
9561

OPTIONS

9563       The  time  command reqires no options other than the gm command to exe‐
9564       cute.
9565

GM VERSION

DESCRIPTION

9568       version displays the software release  version,  build  quantum  (pixel
9569       sample)  depth,  web  site URL, copyright notice, enabled features sup‐
9570       port, configuration parameters, and final build options used  to  build
9571       the  software.   The  available information depends on how the software
9572       was configured and the host system.
9573

EXAMPLES

9575       To display the version information:
9576
9577         GraphicsMagick 1.3.27a 2017-12-11 Q16 http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/
9578         Copyright (C) 2002-2017 GraphicsMagick Group.
9579         Additional copyrights and licenses apply to this software.
9580         See http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/www/Copyright.html for details.
9581         Feature Support:
9582           Native Thread Safe       yes
9583           Large Files (> 32 bit)   yes
9584           Large Memory (> 32 bit)  yes
9585           BZIP                     yes
9586           DPS                      no
9587           FlashPix                 no
9588           FreeType                 yes
9589           Ghostscript (Library)    no
9590           JBIG                     yes
9591           JPEG-2000                yes
9592           JPEG                     yes
9593           Little CMS               yes
9594           Loadable Modules         no
9595           OpenMP                   yes (201307)
9596           PNG                      yes
9597           TIFF                     yes
9598           TRIO                     no
9599           UMEM                     no
9600           WebP                     yes
9601           WMF                      yes
9602           X11                      yes
9603           XML                      yes
9604           ZLIB                     yes
9605         Host type: x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu
9606         Configured using the command:
9607           ./configure  ...
9608         Final Build Parameters:
9609           CC       = ...
9610           CFLAGS   = ...
9611           CPPFLAGS = ...
9612           CXX      = ...
9613           CXXFLAGS = ...
9614           LDFLAGS  = ...
9615           LIBS     = ...
9616
9617

OPTIONS

9619       The version command does not currently support any options.
9620
9621
9622
9623GraphicsMagick                    2019/08/27                             gm(1)
Impressum